WO2022199689A1 - 定位方法、终端及网络侧设备 - Google Patents

定位方法、终端及网络侧设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022199689A1
WO2022199689A1 PCT/CN2022/083018 CN2022083018W WO2022199689A1 WO 2022199689 A1 WO2022199689 A1 WO 2022199689A1 CN 2022083018 W CN2022083018 W CN 2022083018W WO 2022199689 A1 WO2022199689 A1 WO 2022199689A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
reference signal
positioning reference
information
positioning
terminal
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/083018
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
司晔
王园园
庄子荀
邬华明
Original Assignee
维沃移动通信有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 维沃移动通信有限公司 filed Critical 维沃移动通信有限公司
Priority to EP22774343.2A priority Critical patent/EP4319203A1/en
Publication of WO2022199689A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022199689A1/zh
Priority to US18/373,224 priority patent/US20240031934A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W4/00—Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
    • H04W4/02—Services making use of location information
    • H04W4/025—Services making use of location information using location based information parameters
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0225—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal
    • H04W52/0229—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal where the received signal is a wanted signal
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
    • G01S5/00—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations
    • G01S5/02—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations using radio waves
    • G01S5/0205—Details
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/08—Testing, supervising or monitoring using real traffic
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0055—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
    • H04W36/0061—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link of neighbour cell information
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W64/00—Locating users or terminals or network equipment for network management purposes, e.g. mobility management
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W64/00—Locating users or terminals or network equipment for network management purposes, e.g. mobility management
    • H04W64/003—Locating users or terminals or network equipment for network management purposes, e.g. mobility management locating network equipment
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W64/00—Locating users or terminals or network equipment for network management purposes, e.g. mobility management
    • H04W64/006—Locating users or terminals or network equipment for network management purposes, e.g. mobility management with additional information processing, e.g. for direction or speed determination
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/06—Reselecting a communication resource in the serving access point
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/08—Reselecting an access point
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/27—Transitions between radio resource control [RRC] states

Definitions

  • the present application belongs to the field of wireless communication technologies, and specifically relates to a positioning method, a terminal and a network side device.
  • a user equipment (User Equipment, UE) (the UE is also called a terminal) needs to perform a positioning operation in the radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) connected state (connected state). If the terminal is in the RRC idle state ( ilde state) or RRC inactive state (inactive state), you need to enter the RRC connected state before you can perform the positioning operation.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the energy saving solution of the terminal is one of the directions that attracts much attention. If the terminal must perform the positioning operation in the RRC connection state, it will not be conducive to energy saving.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a positioning method, a terminal, and a network-side device, which can solve the problem that a terminal can only perform a positioning operation in an RRC connection state, which is not conducive to energy saving.
  • a positioning method including:
  • the terminal performs a positioning operation in an idle state or an inactive state, where performing the positioning operation includes at least one of the following:
  • a positioning method including:
  • the terminal performs a positioning operation in an idle state, an inactive state or a connected state, wherein performing the positioning operation includes: reporting position-related information, where the position-related information includes an association relationship between a positioning measurement result and a time error group, and/or uplink positioning The relationship between the reference signal and the time error group.
  • a positioning method including:
  • the network-side device performs a positioning operation, where performing the positioning operation includes at least one of the following:
  • a positioning method including:
  • the network-side device performs a positioning operation, wherein the performing of the positioning operation includes:
  • Receive location-related information reported by a terminal in an idle or inactive state where the location-related information includes the correlation between the positioning measurement result and the time error group, and/or the correlation between the uplink positioning reference signal and the time error group.
  • a positioning device comprising:
  • a positioning module configured to perform a positioning operation in an idle state or an inactive state, wherein performing the positioning operation includes at least one of the following:
  • a positioning device comprising:
  • the positioning module is used to perform a positioning operation in an idle state, an inactive state or a connected state, wherein the positioning operation includes:
  • Position-related information is reported, where the position-related information includes the correlation between the positioning measurement result and the time error group, and/or the correlation between the uplink positioning reference signal and the time error group.
  • a positioning device comprising:
  • a positioning module configured to perform a positioning operation, wherein performing the positioning operation includes at least one of the following:
  • a positioning device comprising:
  • the positioning module is used to perform a positioning operation, wherein the positioning operation includes:
  • Receive location-related information reported by a terminal in an idle or inactive state where the location-related information includes the correlation between the positioning measurement result and the time error group, and/or the correlation between the uplink positioning reference signal and the time error group.
  • a terminal in a ninth aspect, includes a processor, a memory, and a program or instruction stored on the memory and executable on the processor, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor. The steps of implementing the method of the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • a terminal including a processor and a communication interface, wherein the processor is configured to perform a positioning operation in an idle state or an inactive state, wherein performing the positioning operation includes at least one of the following:
  • a terminal including a processor and a communication interface, wherein the processor is configured to perform a positioning operation in an idle state, an inactive state or a connected state, wherein the performing the positioning operation includes:
  • Position-related information is reported, where the position-related information includes the correlation between the positioning measurement result and the time error group, and/or the correlation between the uplink positioning reference signal and the time error group.
  • a twelfth aspect provides a network-side device, the network-side device includes a processor, a memory, and a program or instruction stored on the memory and executable on the processor, the program or instruction being The processor implements the steps of the method according to the second aspect when executed.
  • a thirteenth aspect provides a network-side device, including a processor and a communication interface, wherein the processor is configured to perform a positioning operation, wherein performing the positioning operation includes at least one of the following:
  • a thirteenth aspect provides a network-side device, including a processor and a communication interface, wherein the processor is configured to perform a positioning operation, wherein the performing of the positioning operation includes:
  • Receive location-related information reported by a terminal in an idle or inactive state where the location-related information includes the correlation between the positioning measurement result and the time error group, and/or the correlation between the uplink positioning reference signal and the time error group.
  • a fourteenth aspect provides a readable storage medium, on which a program or an instruction is stored, and when the program or instruction is executed by a processor, the first aspect or the second aspect or the third aspect or the The steps of the method of the fourth aspect.
  • a fifteenth aspect provides a chip, the chip includes a processor and a communication interface, the communication interface is coupled to the processor, and the processor is configured to run a program or an instruction to implement the first aspect or the second Aspect or the method of the third aspect or the fourth aspect.
  • a sixteenth aspect provides a computer program/program product, the computer program/program product being stored in a non-transitory storage medium, the program/program product being executed by at least one processor to implement the first Aspects or the steps of the positioning method described in the second aspect or the third aspect or the fourth aspect.
  • the positioning function is performed in the RRC inactive state or the RRC idle state, so as to ensure the positioning performance and low power consumption.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a wireless communication system to which an embodiment of the application can be applied;
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the relationship between the three states of idle state, inactive state and connected state;
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a method for determining an advance of timing advance
  • Fig. 4 is the schematic flow chart of 2-step RACH
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of a positioning method performed by a terminal according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a positioning method performed by a network side device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a positioning device according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a positioning device according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a terminal according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a network side device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • first, second and the like in the description and claims of the present application are used to distinguish similar objects, and are not used to describe a specific order or sequence. It is to be understood that the terms so used are interchangeable under appropriate circumstances so that the embodiments of the present application can be practiced in sequences other than those illustrated or described herein, and that "first”, “second” distinguishes Usually it is a class, and the number of objects is not limited.
  • the first object may be one or multiple.
  • “and/or” in the description and claims indicates at least one of the connected objects, and the character “/" generally indicates that the associated objects are in an "or” relationship.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • LTE-Advanced LTE-Advanced
  • LTE-A Long Term Evolution-Advanced
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • TDMA Time Division Multiple Access
  • FDMA Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • OFDMA Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • SC-FDMA Single-carrier Frequency-Division Multiple Access
  • system and “network” in the embodiments of the present application are often used interchangeably, and the described technology can be used not only for the above-mentioned systems and radio technologies, but also for other systems and radio technologies.
  • NR New Radio
  • the following description describes a New Radio (NR) system for example purposes, and uses NR terminology in most of the description below, but the techniques can also be applied to applications other than NR system applications, such as 6th generation (6th generation ) Generation, 6G) communication system.
  • 6th generation 6th generation
  • 6G 6th generation
  • FIG. 1 shows a block diagram of a wireless communication system to which the embodiments of the present application can be applied.
  • the wireless communication system includes a terminal 11 and a network-side device 12 .
  • the terminal 11 may also be referred to as a terminal device or user equipment (User Equipment, UE), and the terminal 11 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer (Tablet Personal Computer), a laptop computer (Laptop Computer) or a notebook computer, a personal digital computer Assistant (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), PDA, Netbook, Ultra-Mobile Personal Computer (UMPC), Mobile Internet Device (Mobile Internet Device, MID), Wearable Device (Wearable Device) or vehicle-mounted device (VUE), pedestrian terminal (PUE) and other terminal-side devices, wearable devices include: smart watches, bracelets, headphones, glasses, etc.
  • the network side device 12 may be a base station or a core network, wherein the base station may be referred to as a Node B, an evolved Node B, an access point, a Base Transceiver Station (BTS), a radio base station, a radio transceiver, a basic service Set (Basic Service Set, BSS), Extended Service Set (Extended Service Set, ESS), Node B, Evolved Node B (eNB), Home Node B, Home Evolved Node B, Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) ) access point, WiFi node, Transmitting Receiving Point (TRP) or some other suitable term in the field, as long as the same technical effect is achieved, the base station is not limited to specific technical vocabulary, it should be noted that , in the embodiments of the present application, only the base station in the NR system is used as an example, but the specific type of the base station is not limited.
  • the core network may be referred to as a Node B, an evolved Node B, an access point, a
  • RRC idle state (Idle state), RRC inactive state (Inactive state) and RRC connected state (connected state)
  • the RRC idle state is hereinafter referred to as the idle state
  • the RRC inactive state is hereinafter referred to as the inactive state
  • the RRC connected state is hereinafter referred to as the connected state.
  • the UE in the idle state has no RRC context on the network side device, that is to say, the parameters necessary for communication between the network side device and the UE do not belong to a specific cell, and the network side device does not know whether the UE exists.
  • the UE is assigned a set of tracking area identifiers (TAI). From the perspective of the core network, the connection between the radio access network (Access Network, RAN) side and the core network has been disconnected. In order to reduce power consumption, the UE is in a dormant state most of the time, so data transmission cannot be performed.
  • UEs in idle state may wake up periodically to receive paging messages (if any) from the network. Mobility can be handled by UE performing cell reselection. In the idle state, the UE and the network side device will not maintain uplink synchronization. If the user wants to switch from the idle state to the connected state, the RRC context can only be established between the UE and the network side device through random access (Random Access).
  • an RRC context can be established and all parameters required for communication are known to both entities (UE and network side equipment).
  • the UE is in the core network connected (CN_Connected) state.
  • the cell to which the UE belongs is known, and has been configured with a destination device identifier for transmission signaling between the UE and the network side device, that is, a cell radio network temporary identifier (Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier, C-RNTI).
  • C-RNTI Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier
  • the mobility can be controlled by the network side device, that is, the UE provides neighbor cell measurements to the network side device, and the network side device commands the UE to perform handover.
  • Uplink time synchronization may or may not exist. When there is data to be transmitted, uplink synchronization can be established by using random access.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • NR New Radio
  • the inactive state In the inactive state, the RRC context between the network side device and the UE side is maintained. From the perspective of the core network, the connection between the RAN side and the core network is in a state. Therefore, the transition from the inactive state to the connected state is fast, and no core network signaling is required. At the same time, the UE is allowed to sleep in an idle state-like manner, and the mobility is handled through cell reselection. Therefore, the inactive state can be regarded as a mixture of idle and connected states.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the relationship among three states: idle state, inactive state, and connected state. It can be seen that an important difference between different states is the mobility mechanism involved. Efficient mobility handling is a critical part of any mobile communication system. For idle state and inactive state, mobility is handled by UE through cell reselection, while for connected state, mobility is handled by network side equipment based on UE measurements.
  • the common point between the two is that they have the functions of public land mobile network (Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN) selection, cell selection and reselection, and system message reception; the differences include the following: Part: (1) Since the core network only knows the tracking area (Tracking Area, TA) where the UE is located in the idle state, but does not know the specific primary cell identifier (pcell id), it will be in the tracking area or tracking area list (list) Paging is delivered, but for the inactive state, NG-RAN knows which RNA the UE belongs to, so it will only page the UE in the RNA area; (2) UE access stratum (AS) context is stored in the UE and the UE in the inactive state. In NG-RNA; (3) the UE saves the non-access stratum (Non-Access Stratum, NAS) signaling connection under the control plane and the user plane 5GC-NG-RAN connection in the inactive state.
  • PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
  • the common points between them are: (1) UE access stratum context is stored in the UE and NG-RNA in the inactive state; (2) The connection between the control plane and the user plane It has been established, so the core network usually thinks that the UE is in the connected state; the difference between the two is: (1) In the connected state, the NG-RAN knows the serving cell where the UE is located, but in the inactive state NG-RAN knows which RNA the UE belongs to, so Only paging the UE in the RNA area; (2) In the inactive state, the UE has the functions of PLMN network search, cell reselection and system message reception; (3) In the connected state, the UE has the functions of uplink and downlink channel transmission and mobility (handover) .
  • the scenarios in which the UE enters the connected state from the inactive state include: uplink data to be sent; non-access stratum signaling process initiation; RAN paging response; notification that the network has left the RAN notification area; periodic RAN notification
  • the notification area update timer has timed out.
  • SRS Uplink Positioning Reference Signal
  • the time domain types of the Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) for channel sounding include periodic, aperiodic and semi-static.
  • the number of combs refers to the number of subcarrier intervals between two adjacent SRS resources in the frequency domain, and the corresponding maximum cyclic shift
  • the bits (cyclic shift) are 8, 12, 6 respectively.
  • the SRS resource configuration also includes the number of symbols and the initial symbol of the SRS resource.
  • the SRS resource configuration includes a slot offset.
  • the SRS resource configuration includes a period and a slot offset, and the period unit is a slot.
  • the SRS resource configuration also includes the spatial relationship SRS-SpatialRelationInfoPos of the SRS, the reference signal of the spatial relationship may be the synchronization signal block (Synchronization Signal and PBCH block, SSB) of the serving cell, the channel state information reference signal (channel State Information Reference Signal, CSI-RS) and SRS, SSB of neighboring cells and downlink positioning reference signal (Positioning Reference Signal, PRS).
  • SRS resource configuration can refer to the following:
  • Timing advance is used for UE uplink transmission, which means that the system frame in which the UE sends uplink data is ahead of the corresponding downlink frame by a certain time.
  • the specific advance is calculated by the base station according to the random access preamble (preamble) sent by the UE, and then The UE is then notified through a timing advance command (Timing Advance Command, TAC).
  • N TA is the amount parsed by the UE in the timing advance command.
  • N TA, offset is notified to the UE through the parameter n-TimingAdvanceOffset. If the UE does not receive this parameter, a preset value is used.
  • the value is a fixed value related to the multiplexing mode and frequency range. The specific values are shown in Table 1:
  • the base station determines the timing advance value by measuring the received preamble, and sends it to the UE through the Timing Advance Command (TAC) in the random access response (Rach access response, RAR).
  • TAC Timing Advance Command
  • RAR random access response
  • N TA T A ⁇ 16 ⁇ 64/2 ⁇ .
  • N TA is also related to the subcarrier spacing, and the subcarrier spacing depends on the first uplink transmission after receiving the RAR, that is, the subcarrier spacing of Msg3.
  • N TA_old is the N TA used before receiving the TAC
  • N TA_new is the updated N TA after receiving the TAC.
  • the 4-step random access process includes: contention-based random access process (4-step random access (4-step RACH)) and non-contention-based random access process.
  • the UE sends Msg1 (random access request) to the network side device.
  • the network side device After receiving the Msg1, the network side device sends a Msg2 (random access response RAR) message to the UE to the UE, and the message carries uplink grant (uplink grant) information.
  • the UE sends Msg3 according to the uplink grant in Msg2.
  • the network side device After receiving the Msg3, the network side device sends the Msg4 (eg, the contention resolution identifier) to the UE.
  • the UE receives Msg4 and judges whether the contention is successfully resolved. If successful, the random access procedure is successful, otherwise, the random access procedure is re-initialized.
  • the network-side device For the "non-contention-based random access procedure", the network-side device allocates dedicated RACH resources for the UE to access, the UE sends Msg1 (random access request) to the network-side device on the dedicated resource, and the network-side device receives the Msg1 Then send a Msg2 (random access response RAR) message to the UE.
  • Msg1 random access request
  • Msg2 random access response RAR
  • 2-step RACH includes the following steps:
  • Step 0 The network side device configures the UE with the configuration information of the 2-step RACH, for example, including: sending resource information corresponding to MsgA and MsgB.
  • Step 1 The UE triggers a 2-step RACH procedure.
  • PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel
  • the UE may also send physical random access channel (Physical Random Access Channel, PRACH) information to the network side device.
  • PRACH Physical Random Access Channel
  • Step 2 The network side device sends confirmation information (MsgB) to the UE. If the UE fails to receive the MsgB, the UE resends the MsgA.
  • MsgB confirmation information
  • the uplink positioning process includes the following steps:
  • Step 0 LMF and gNB/TRP exchange configuration information
  • Step 1 LMF and UE exchange capability information
  • Step 2 LMF sends NR Positioning Protocol A (NRPPa) Positioning Information Request to gNB/TRP;
  • NRPPa NR Positioning Protocol A
  • Step 3-3a gNB/TRP determines uplink SRS resources and sends SRS configuration to UE;
  • Step 4 gNB/TRP sends NRPPa positioning response to LMF
  • Step 5a LMF sends NRPPa positioning activation request to gNB/TRP;
  • Step 5b gNB/TRP activates UE SRS transmission
  • Step 5c gNB/TRP sends NRPPa positioning activation response to LMF;
  • Step 6 LMF sends NRPPa measurement request to gNB/TRP;
  • Step 7 gNB/TRP performs UL SRS measurement
  • Step 8 gNB/TRP sends NRPPa measurement response to LMF.
  • the UE when the UE is in the idle state or inactive state, the UE can directly send data to the network-side device by the following methods:
  • PUSCH resources configured by the network (ie, pre-configured (pre-configured) PUSCH; or, preallocated uplink resources (Preallocated Uplink Resource, PUR)).
  • the network side device can directly send data to the UE in the following ways:
  • the on-demand PRS is not introduced in the R-16 protocol, and the PRS is sent in the form of broadcast.
  • the PRS configuration is relatively fixed, and the PRS configuration cannot be changed flexibly, which may cause waste of some resources.
  • a network device configures 128 TRPs in a certain area to send PRS with a large bandwidth, and in this area, only some UEs have high positioning accuracy requirements, or only some UEs have positioning requirements, then for this part of UEs It is not worthwhile to make PRS covering a large bandwidth in the whole area.
  • a PRS with a small bandwidth is configured in a certain area, and some of the UEs have strong positioning accuracy, delay requirements or power consumption requirements. PRS.
  • on-demand PRS has been introduced to specifically address the positioning requirements of one or some UEs, and flexibly increase or decrease the PRS configuration.
  • the on-demand PRS configuration is set to multiple PRS configuration parameter sets (including period, bandwidth, frequency, etc.), the transmission of certain PRS parameter sets is turned off when not needed, and the transmission of certain PRS parameter sets is turned on when needed. some PRS transmissions.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a positioning method, including:
  • Step 61 The terminal performs a positioning operation in an idle state or an inactive state, wherein performing the positioning operation includes at least one of the following:
  • the location-related information includes but is not limited to at least one of the following: location information, positioning measurement results, event information, RRM measurement results, downlink positioning measurement results and/or the association between uplink positioning reference signals and time error groups, etc.
  • the event information includes but is not limited to at least one of the following: area events and action events, etc.
  • An area event means that the UE detects that it has entered, left or is located in a specified target area (such as area cell list/RNA/TAC).
  • An action event is when the UE detects that it has moved more than a predefined linear distance from its previous position.
  • the feature of low energy consumption in an inactive state or an idle state is utilized to develop a positioning function to ensure positioning performance and low power consumption.
  • the feature of low energy consumption in an inactive state or an idle state is used to develop a positioning function to ensure positioning performance and low power consumption.
  • the PRS can be regarded as a common signal at the cell level or the area level, and the UEs in the connected state or the non-connected state (idle state or inactive state) can all share the same PRS in the same area.
  • the LMF can enable, disable or update the configuration information of the PRS according to the needs of the UE or itself.
  • On-demand PRS on/off/update also affects the UE in idle state or inactive state receiving PRS.
  • the UE can acquire the PRS configuration information in the idle state or in the inactive state by means of broadcast or unicast (eg, through RRC release signaling).
  • the network changes the configuration information of the PRS as needed, such as turning off the configuration information of the PRS
  • the UE will 'wake up' at the time of the original PRS configuration to search and monitor the PRS. , which results in wasted power consumption. Therefore, how to notify the UE in the idle state or the inactive state of the on, off or update of the configuration information of the PRS, or the availability of the PRS is a problem that needs to be solved.
  • the present application provides a method for notifying a terminal of a positioning reference signal configuration change without changing system information.
  • the method for updating the configuration of the positioning reference signal will be described separately below.
  • the positioning method further includes: the terminal receives first indication information in an idle state or an inactive state, where the first indication information includes at least one of the following:
  • the availability can also be expressed as ON or OFF information of the positioning reference signal (or the configuration information of the positioning reference signal).
  • the configuration information may also be referred to as auxiliary information
  • the configuration information includes at least one of the following: spatial relationship configuration and path loss configuration.
  • the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the following: the uplink positioning reference signal and the downlink positioning reference signal.
  • the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the following: PRS, uplink positioning reference signal (SRS for positioning), CSI-RS, TRS, SSB, preamble, etc.
  • the network-side device may determine whether to initiate a positioning reference signal configuration update according to at least one of the following conditions:
  • On-demand PRS enables configuration updates
  • the UE maintains the RRM measurement and reporting in an idle state or an inactive state, and the network side device obtains the latest beam measurement result, and updates configurations such as spatial relationship and/or path loss.
  • the terminal further includes:
  • the terminal assumes that the positioning reference signal does not exist, or the positioning reference signal is not sent, or the positioning reference signal is stopped, or not sending the positioning reference signal, or stopping sending the positioning reference signal;
  • the terminal assumes that the positioning reference signal corresponding to the configuration information of the positioning reference signal does not exist, or that the configuration information corresponding to the positioning reference signal does not exist.
  • the positioning reference signal is not sent, or the positioning reference signal corresponding to the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is stopped, or the positioning reference signal corresponding to the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is not sent, or the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is stopped.
  • the positioning reference signal corresponding to the information is not sent, or the positioning reference signal corresponding to the information.
  • the terminal optionally, if the terminal assumes that the positioning reference signal does not exist, or the positioning reference signal is not sent, or the positioning reference signal is stopped from being sent, the terminal does not The reference signal performs the measurement.
  • the update information of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the following:
  • the indication information for indicating whether the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is updated or the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the following:
  • the spatial relationship configuration of the positioning reference signal is changed
  • the path loss configuration of the positioning reference signal changes.
  • the turning on or off of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal refers to setting a switch to control 'on/off' of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal. For example, if the switch is set to 'on', the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is turned on; if it is set to 'off', the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is turned off.
  • 'on/off' can also be represented by 'enable' or 'not enable'.
  • the positioning reference signal indicated by the first indication information is one of the following granularities:
  • Positioning reference signals in all frequency layers such as PRS.
  • the terminal receiving the first indication information in an idle state or an inactive state includes at least one of the following:
  • the terminal obtains the first indication information in a paging physical downlink control channel (Physical downlink control channel, PDCCH);
  • a paging physical downlink control channel Physical downlink control channel, PDCCH
  • the first indication information is represented by bits of a short message (short message) in the paging PDCCH, or represented by a reserved (reserved) bit in the paging PDCCH.
  • the terminal obtains the first indication information in the paging physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) scheduled by the paging PDCCH;
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • the terminal obtains whether the configuration information of the positioning reference signal has updated indication information in the paging PDCCH, and obtains the updated positioning in the paging PDSCH scheduled by the paging PDCCH. Configuration information of the reference signal.
  • the paging PDCCH is a PDCCH on which a paging message is scheduled. That is, the first indication information can be carried by the paging PDSCH if and only if the paging PDCCH schedules the paging message.
  • the terminal obtains the first indication information in a paging early indication (PEI);
  • PEI paging early indication
  • the paging advance indication can be interpreted as a paging wake-up signal.
  • the terminal obtains the first indication information in a random access process or a small data transmission process; for example, obtains the first indication information in a random access process or a small data transmission process for terminal termination (Mobile Terminated, MT) data transmission the first instruction information;
  • the message of the random access procedure includes one of the following: Msg2, Msg4, MsgB.
  • the terminal obtains the first indication information in a broadcast message
  • the broadcast message is, for example, a System Information Block (SIB) message.
  • SIB System Information Block
  • the terminal obtains the first indication information in the RRC release message
  • the obtaining the first indication information in the RRC release message includes:
  • the first indication information is obtained in the RRC release message to indicate the configuration of the subsequent positioning reference signal.
  • the terminal obtains the first indication information in the PDCCH and/or PDSCH according to the downlink listening opportunity and/or the monitoring window configured by the network side device;
  • obtaining the first indication information in the PDCCH and/or PDSCH includes:
  • the terminal obtains the first indication information from the PDCCH scrambled by the C-RNTI and/or the PDSCH scheduled by the PDCCH scrambled by the C-RNTI.
  • obtaining the first indication information in the PDCCH scrambled by the C-RNTI and/or the PDSCH scheduled by the PDCCH scrambled by the C-RNTI includes:
  • the terminal After the terminal reports the location-related information, it obtains whether the configuration information of the positioning reference signal has updated indication information in the PDCCH scrambled by the C-RNTI, and obtains the updated information in the PDSCH scheduled by the PDCCH scrambled by the C-RNTI. the configuration information of the positioning reference signal;
  • the first indication information is obtained in the PDSCH scheduled by the PDCCH scrambled by the C-RNTI;
  • the PDCCH scrambled by the C-RNTI and/or the PDSCH scheduled on the PDCCH scrambled by the C-RNTI is reported or before the RRC release message after the successful contention resolution message is reported.
  • the terminal obtains the first indication information from a downlink scheduling resource (such as a semi-persistent scheduling resource (Semi-Persistent Scheduling, SPS) resource) PDSCH configured by the network side device.
  • a downlink scheduling resource such as a semi-persistent scheduling resource (Semi-Persistent Scheduling, SPS) resource
  • the first indication information further includes indication information of whether to enter a connected state and update the configuration information of the positioning reference signal.
  • the terminal receiving the first indication information in an idle state or an inactive state further includes:
  • the terminal initiates random access to enter the connected state and updates the configuration information of the positioning reference signal.
  • the first indication information does not include indication information that does not enter the connected state to update the configuration information of the positioning reference signal, which may be a default configuration or a default configuration.
  • the terminal further includes:
  • the terminal sends first feedback information, where the first feedback information is used to indicate that the first feedback information has been received an instruction message.
  • the terminal further includes:
  • the terminal sends first feedback information, where the first feedback information is used to indicate that the first indication information has been received.
  • the terminal may send the first feedback information when the first indication information includes the indication information not to enter the connected state to update the configuration information of the positioning reference signal, or may not send the first feedback information according to the first indication information. Send the first feedback information directly.
  • the first indication information or the first feedback information is an LTE positioning protocol (LTE position protocol, LPP) message (the LPP message may be direct signaling between the location server and the UE), which may be carried by the NAS message, and further carried in the RRC message (carried by SRB0 or SRB2).
  • LTE position protocol LPP
  • the LPP message may be direct signaling between the location server and the UE
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the first feedback information is sent in an idle state or an inactive state or after the terminal enters a connected state (eg, initiates an RRC connection establishment or recovery process to enter the connected state).
  • the sending of the first feedback information in an idle state or an inactive state includes: sending by means of SDT (such as random access small data transmission (RA-SDT)), or by using a network (pre-)configured uplink resources (such as PUSCH or PUCCH) are sent.
  • SDT such as random access small data transmission (RA-SDT)
  • pre- pre-configured uplink resources
  • the SDT mode can also be called uplink SDT, and the SDT mode can include at least one of the following: SDT on the control plane, SDT on the user plane, RACH-based SDT, and Configure grant-based SDT.
  • the first feedback information is carried in the RRC resume request (resumerequest) message by means of SDT.
  • all the methods for feedback by means of SDT in the embodiments of the present application may be consistent with the manner in which the UE reports location-related information.
  • the first indication information further includes at least one of the following information:
  • Resource configuration information of the first feedback information such as time-frequency location, etc.
  • the first feedback information includes at least one of the following:
  • the feedback reasons include at least one of the following: feedback of the availability of the positioning reference signal, feedback of the configuration information update of the positioning reference signal, and the positioning reference initiated by the network side device Update feedback of the configuration information of the signal; in an embodiment, optionally, the feedback reason is carried by the recovery reason in the RRC recovery request message.
  • the update response of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal where the update response is used to respond to whether the configuration information of the positioning reference signal in the first indication information has updated indication information.
  • the first feedback information only carries the feedback reason and/or the configuration information update response of the positioning reference signal. That is, the first feedback information does not carry other uplink data except the feedback reason and/or the configuration information update response of the positioning reference signal.
  • the method further includes: receiving, by the terminal, updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal.
  • the terminal receiving the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal includes one of the following manners:
  • the terminal obtains the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal in the PDSCH scheduled by the PDCCH scrambled by the C-RNTI; optionally, the PDCCH scrambled by the C-RNTI and its scheduled PDSCH are in the first feedback information or After a successful contention resolution message, before RRC releases the message.
  • the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal is received.
  • the terminal receiving the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal includes: receiving the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal before the first timer expires.
  • the UE In the connected state, when the measurement gap is not configured, the UE can only measure and activate the DL BWP parameter configuration ( numerology) the same PRS. In the idle state or the inactive state, if the UE is configured with an initial DL BWP and the UE wants to receive a positioning reference signal, how the UE behaves is a problem that needs to be solved.
  • receiving and measuring the downlink positioning reference signal includes:
  • the terminal If the terminal is configured with the initial downlink BWP, the terminal performs one of the following:
  • the terminal does not expect to receive the downlink positioning reference signal outside the initial downlink BWP.
  • the parameter configuration includes at least one of the following: subcarrier spacing (SCS), cyclic prefix (CP) type.
  • SCS subcarrier spacing
  • CP cyclic prefix
  • the terminal does not expect to receive downlink positioning reference signals with different numbers in the initial downlink BWP.
  • the terminal does not receive the downlink positioning reference signal, and the first signal includes at least one of the following: SIB1, except for all Other SIBs (Other SIB), Msg2, MSg4, MsgB, scheduling SIB1 PDCCH, SSB;
  • SIB1 except for all Other SIBs (Other SIB), Msg2, MSg4, MsgB, scheduling SIB1 PDCCH, SSB;
  • the terminal does not expect to receive the downlink positioning reference signal and the first signal in the same symbol. Or when the downlink positioning reference signal and the first signal are repeated (or collided or transmitted) in the same symbol, the terminal is not required (unexpected) to process the downlink positioning reference signal.
  • the terminal receives the downlink positioning reference signal outside the initial downlink BWP (or not in the initial downlink BWP);
  • the terminal receives the downlink positioning reference signal outside the initial downlink BWP.
  • the terminal receiving the downlink positioning reference signal outside the initial downlink BWP includes: if receiving an enable (enable) indication sent by the network side device, the terminal receives the downlink positioning reference signal outside the initial downlink BWP. the downlink positioning reference signal (or the downlink positioning reference signal is not received in the initial downlink BWP). For example: when receiving the enable instruction, the terminal may not receive the downlink positioning reference signal in the initial downlink BWP (or, receive the downlink positioning reference signal outside the initial downlink BWP); otherwise, the terminal can only receive the downlink positioning reference signal in the initial downlink BWP (Or the terminal cannot receive the downlink positioning reference signal outside the initial downlink BWP).
  • the terminal does not expect to receive and transmit other signals or data during the time period during which the downlink positioning reference signal is received, except at least one of the following signals: PRS, a reference signal used for RRM measurement, used for random access process signal.
  • the time period for receiving the downlink positioning reference signal may be a measurement interval in an idle state or an inactive state, and may be obtained by at least one of network indication, protocol agreement, and terminal selection.
  • the terminal receiving the downlink positioning reference signal outside the initial downlink BWP includes: if the downlink positioning reference signal and the first signal are repeated or collided or transmitted in the same symbol, the terminal simultaneously receives the downlink positioning reference signal.
  • the positioning reference signal and the first signal wherein the downlink positioning reference signal is outside the initial downlink BWP, and the first signal is within the initial downlink BWP.
  • the first signal includes at least one of the following: SIB1, other SIBs (Other SIBs) except the SIB1, Msg2, MSg4, MsgB, the PDCCH that schedules SIB1, and the SSB.
  • the terminal's ability to receive the downlink positioning reference signal and the first signal in the same symbol belongs to the terminal's capability, and the terminal needs to report the capability to the network device.
  • the terminal performs BWP handover according to an instruction of the network side device, a protocol agreement or a selection of the terminal, and receives the downlink positioning reference signal on the BWP after the handover.
  • the terminal if the downlink positioning reference signal is located outside the initial downlink BWP, and/or, the parameter configuration of the downlink positioning reference signal is different from that of the initial downlink BWP, the terminal according to the network side device instruction, protocol agreement or selection of the terminal, BWP handover is performed, and the downlink positioning reference signal is received on the handover BWP.
  • the UE is allowed to monitor the physical downlink control channel scrambled by the C-RNTI for a period of time between the successful contention resolution and the RRC release message.
  • PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • the UE reports the positioning data it also indicates whether the positioning data has subsequent data transmission and the size of the data, so that the network side device can schedule the subsequent positioning data with the PDCCH scrambled by the C-RNTI.
  • the C-RNTI in the present invention can also be replaced by other RNTIs, including but not limited to I-RNTI (RNTI in an inactive state), or a dedicated RNTI for positioning, and so on.
  • I-RNTI RNTI in an inactive state
  • dedicated RNTI for positioning, and so on.
  • the location-related information includes: second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate subsequent data transmission information, and is used to assist the network-side device to perform the subsequent positioning process, such as The auxiliary network side device confirms whether the subsequent uplink data transmission needs to be scheduled.
  • the information of the subsequent data transmission includes at least one of the following:
  • the type of data to be transmitted subsequently includes at least one of the following: positioning-related data or non-positioning-related data (such as service data), control plane data or user plane data, signaling radio bearer (SRB1, SRB1 or SRB0), Non-Access Stratum (NAS) or Data Radio Bearer (DRB) data.
  • positioning-related data or non-positioning-related data such as service data
  • control plane data or user plane data signaling radio bearer (SRB1, SRB1 or SRB0), Non-Access Stratum (NAS) or Data Radio Bearer (DRB) data.
  • SRB1, SRB1 or SRB0 signaling radio bearer
  • NAS Non-Access Stratum
  • DRB Data Radio Bearer
  • the method further includes: transmitting subsequent data to be transmitted on the PUSCH scheduled by the PDCCH configured by the network side device.
  • the PDCCH configured by the network side device is scrambled by the C-RNTI.
  • the PDCCH configured by the network side device and the PUSCH scheduled by the PDCCH configured by the network side device are located after the location-related information report or the contention resolution message and before the RRC release message.
  • the type indication of the scheduled uplink data is carried in the PDCCH configured by the network side device; transmitting subsequent data to be transmitted on the PUSCH scheduled by the PDCCH configured by the network side device includes:
  • the subsequent data to be transmitted corresponding to the type indicated by the type indication is transmitted on the PUSCH scheduled by the PDCCH configured by the network side device.
  • the positioning method further includes: the terminal sending third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information of the positioning reference signal needs to be updated, so as to inform the network side device to downlink The configuration information of the positioning reference signal and/or the uplink positioning reference signal needs to be updated.
  • the positioning reference signal includes at least one of an uplink positioning reference signal and a downlink positioning reference signal.
  • the configuration information includes at least one of the following: spatial beam information and path loss configuration information.
  • the third indication information is sent in an SDT manner or after the terminal enters a connected state (eg, the terminal initiates an RRC connection establishment or a connection recovery process enters the connected state).
  • the third indication information further includes: a reason for sending the third indication information (such as a reason for initiating SDT), and the reason includes at least one of the following: The update of the configuration information, the update of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal, the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is unavailable.
  • a reason for sending the third indication information such as a reason for initiating SDT
  • the positioning reference signal indicated by the third indication information is one of the following granularities:
  • One or more sets of positioning reference signals under the configuration information of the positioning reference signals are One or more sets of positioning reference signals under the configuration information of the positioning reference signals
  • the third indication information further includes at least one of the following, to assist the network-side device in maintaining the configuration information of the downlink positioning reference signal and/or the uplink positioning reference signal in the idle state or the inactive state, such as spatial beam information and/or path loss configuration information:
  • the measurement result of the positioning reference signal of the serving cell including but not limited to at least one of CSI-RS, SSB, PRS, and TRS;
  • the measurement result of the positioning reference signal of the neighboring cell including but not limited to at least one of CSI-RS, SSB, PRS, and TRS.
  • the RRM measurement result may be a cell level (cell level) measurement result and/or a beam level (beam level) measurement result.
  • the measurement result includes at least one of the following: a reference signal (SSB and/or CSI-RS) identifier, the measurement result of the N best beams higher than the threshold, the N best beams higher than the threshold Beam indication, measurement result of the best beam, indication of the best beam, measurement results of the first N beams with the strongest Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP), the first N beams with the strongest RSRP Indication, N is agreed by the protocol, indicated by the network side device or selected by the terminal.
  • RSRP Reference Signal Received Power
  • the sending, by the terminal, the third indication information includes: when the terminal satisfies at least one of the following conditions, sending the third indication information:
  • the adjustment of the tracking area exceeds the first tracking area threshold ie the tracking area changes.
  • the adjustment of the tracking area can be obtained in at least one of the following ways:
  • the terminal automatically adjusts the tracking area
  • N-TA-offset change (n-TimingAdvanceOffset indication), from the network side device indication, such as SIB1;
  • TA command indication from the network side device indication, such as Msg2 or MsgB or other information.
  • the terminal If the terminal detects that the difference between the two first measurement values before and after exceeds the first measurement threshold, and the terminal does not enter the connected state, it sends the third indication information, and the first measurement value includes at least one of the following: 1: measurement information of SSB, measurement information of paging or Msg2 or Msg4 or MsgB, measurement information of the positioning reference signal;
  • the first measurement value includes at least one of the following:
  • SSB measurement information such as RSRP, Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ) and/or SSB timing measurement information
  • Msg2, Msg4 or MsgB measurement information such as RSRP and/or RSRQ;
  • Measurement information of the PRS such as RSRP, RSRQ and/or Time Difference of Arrival (TDOA).
  • the measurement information of the SSB may be cell-level or beam-level measurement information.
  • the measurement information of the PRS may be the measurement information of TRP-level or PRS resource-level or PRS resource set-level.
  • the reasons why the downlink positioning reference signal cannot be received, the location-related information cannot be reported, or the uplink positioning reference signal cannot be sent include one of the following:
  • SRS uplink positioning reference signal
  • PRS downlink positioning reference signal
  • IDRX Idle Discontinuous Reception
  • the preconfigured area where the configuration information of the positioning reference signal takes effect is a certain cell, a certain cell list, or an area covered by a certain or certain SSBs.
  • the terminal after the terminal sends the third indication information, it further includes: the terminal receives the first indication information in an idle state or an inactive state, where the first indication information includes at least one of the following: one:
  • the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the following: the uplink positioning reference signal and the downlink positioning reference signal.
  • the terminal after the terminal sends the third indication information, it further includes:
  • the terminal starts a third timer, and receives the first indication information before the third timer expires.
  • the reported location-related information includes:
  • the measurement information includes at least one of the following:
  • the above measurement information is reported to assist the network side equipment to maintain the configuration information of the downlink positioning reference signal and/or the uplink positioning reference signal in the idle state or inactive state.
  • the configuration information includes but is not limited to: spatial beam information and/or path loss configuration information, etc. Wait.
  • the measurement information is reported through an SDT method (eg, through a CG-based SDT method) or enters a connected state (eg, the UE initiates an RRC connection establishment or recovery process, and enters the connected state) to report the measurement information.
  • an SDT method eg, through a CG-based SDT method
  • enters a connected state eg, the UE initiates an RRC connection establishment or recovery process, and enters the connected state
  • the terminal periodically reports the measurement information.
  • the terminal before the terminal periodically reports the measurement information, it further includes:
  • the terminal receives the reporting configuration of the measurement information, and the reporting configuration includes but is not limited to at least one of the following:
  • the content of the reported measurement results such as RSRP, etc.
  • the reporting configuration for the terminal to receive the measurement information includes at least one of the following:
  • the terminal obtains the reporting configuration of the measurement information in the RRC release message.
  • the uplink positioning reference signal includes: aperiodic SRS or semi-persistent SRS.
  • the UE in the method based on random access small data transmission (RA-SDT), the UE is allowed to monitor the C-RNTI scrambling for a period of time between the successful resolution of the contention and the RRC release (release) message.
  • the PDCCH scrambled by the C-RNTI may be used to trigger the sending of the aperiodic SRS, so as to assist the network device to complete the uplink positioning measurement.
  • sending the aperiodic SRS includes at least one of the following:
  • the aperiodic SRS is triggered and sent by the PDCCH scrambled by the C-RNTI;
  • This solution is suitable for event-triggered positioning, for example, when an event occurs, the UE is triggered to send an uplink positioning request and an aperiodic SRS triggering request to a network-side device. After receiving the request, the network side device triggers the sending of the aperiodic SRS during the period after the contention is successfully resolved and before the RRC releases the signaling.
  • sending the semi-persistent SRS includes at least one of the following:
  • the semi-persistent SRS is activated and sent by the PDSCH (such as a Media Access Control (MAC) control element (Control Element, CE) carried by the network side equipment) scheduled by the network side equipment to assist the network side equipment to complete the uplink positioning measurement;
  • PDSCH such as a Media Access Control (MAC) control element (Control Element, CE) carried by the network side equipment
  • CE Media Access Control
  • the PDSCH and/or the semi-persistent SRS scheduled by the network side device are received before the RRC release message after the contention is successfully resolved.
  • the PDSCH is scheduled by the PDCCH scrambled by the C-RNTI.
  • the effective time of the semi-persistent SRS is after the contention is successfully resolved and before the RRC releases the message.
  • the method before sending the uplink positioning reference signal, the method further includes: the terminal sends request information in an SDT mode (such as an RA-SDT mode), where the request information is used to request the network side device to trigger an aperiodic SRS or activate a semi-persistent SRS,
  • the request information includes at least one of the following:
  • Aperiodic SRS trigger request or semi-persistent SRS activation request
  • the event information includes but is not limited to: area events, action events, and the like.
  • An area event means that the UE detects that it has entered, left or is located in a specified target area (such as area cell list/RNA/TAC).
  • An action event is when the UE detects that it has moved more than a predefined linear distance from its previous position.
  • the request information is carried by an RRC recovery request message.
  • the request message is carried by the recovery reason in the RRC recovery request message, such as a-SRS request, sp-SRS request.
  • the request information further includes: indication information whether feedback from the network side device is required. For example: when the request information includes the need for network-side device feedback, the UE will then receive network-side device feedback, indicating that the network-side device can trigger aperiodic SRS or semi-persistent SRS, or the network-side device cannot trigger aperiodic SRS or semi-persistent SRS. Sustained SRS.
  • sending the request information by means of SDT includes: when an event occurs, sending the request information by means of SDT, and the event includes but is not limited to at least one of the following: area event and action event.
  • Receive second feedback information sent by the network side device where the second feedback information includes indication information of whether the network side device triggers an aperiodic SRS or activates a semi-persistent SRS.
  • the second feedback information is carried by the RRC release message, or carried by the PDCCH, or carried by the PDSCH, and the PDCCH and the PDSCH are received before the RRC release signaling after the contention is successfully resolved.
  • the positioning method further includes: receiving configuration information of the aperiodic SRS or semi-persistent SRS, where the configuration information is carried in one of the following ways: system information, a previous RRC release message, and a previous RRC dedicated message .
  • the positioning method further includes: the terminal sending fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate an uplink positioning reference signal timing change (such as SRS timing change) to assist The network equipment accurately measures the uplink positioning reference signal and performs accurate positioning.
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate an uplink positioning reference signal timing change (such as SRS timing change) to assist The network equipment accurately measures the uplink positioning reference signal and performs accurate positioning.
  • the fourth indication information sent by the terminal includes one of the following:
  • the terminal sends the fourth indication information by means of SDT (for example, by means of CG-based SDT and/or RACH-based SDT);
  • the terminal enters the connected state (for example, the UE initiates an RRC connection establishment/restoration process to enter the connected state) and sends the fourth indication information.
  • the fourth indication information is carried by an RRC recovery request message.
  • the fourth indication information is carried by the recovery reason in the RRC recovery request message.
  • the fourth indication information further includes:
  • the reason that causes the timing of the uplink positioning reference signal to change, and the reasons include at least one of the following: cell handover or cell reselection of the terminal to camp on, the terminal automatically adjusts the timing of the uplink positioning reference signal, the terminal receives the camping reference signal timing Timing advance command for the cell.
  • the terminal sending the fourth indication information includes:
  • the fourth indication information is sent: the terminal's camping cell handover or cell reselection, the terminal automatically adjusts the timing of the uplink positioning reference signal, and the terminal receives the camping cell The timing advance (Timing advance) command.
  • the above-mentioned reason for causing the timing change of the uplink positioning reference signal is also event information that triggers the UE to indicate the timing change of the uplink positioning reference signal.
  • the UE indicates that the timing of the uplink positioning reference signal changes to the serving gNB (or the resident gNB) and/or the location server. It is then sent by the serving gNB (or the resident gNB) and/or the location server to other gNBs participating in the positioning.
  • the UE instructs the uplink positioning reference signal timing to change to the network device.
  • the threshold can be determined by at least one of protocol stipulation, network instruction/pre-configuration, and terminal selection.
  • a UE in an idle state or an inactive state periodically wakes up and monitors a paging message, and this cycle is the IDRX cycle.
  • the UE may try to measure downlink positioning reference signals near paging, or send uplink positioning reference signals, or report location-related information, so as to reduce the number of times the UE wakes up and save power consumption. Then, it is necessary to define the relationship between the UE measuring the downlink positioning reference signal, or sending the uplink positioning reference signal, or reporting the position-related information, and IDRX.
  • the IDRX configuration may change, so it is necessary to report the handover information of the camping cell to the network-side device to assist the network-side device to determine the measurement and transmission behavior of the UE in the new camping cell .
  • the gNB in the positioning area needs to send its own IDRX configuration to the location server to help the location server confirm the subsequent behavior.
  • the positioning method further includes: sending, by the terminal, fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate a change of the camping cell, so as to assist the network side device to perform subsequent resource allocation or positioning process.
  • the serving gNB (or the camping gNB) can obtain the information of the change of the camping cell of the UE, and the change information of the camping cell can also be sent by the serving gNB (or the camping gNB) to the location server.
  • the fifth indication information sent by the terminal includes one of the following:
  • the terminal sends the fifth indication information by means of SDT (for example, by means of CG-based SDT and/or RACH-based SDT);
  • the terminal enters the connected state (for example, the UE initiates an RRC connection establishment or recovery process, and enters the connected state) to send the fifth indication information.
  • the fifth indication information is carried by an RRC recovery request message.
  • the fifth indication information is carried by the recovery reason in the RRC recovery request message.
  • the fifth indication information further includes identification information of the camping cell.
  • sending the fifth indication information by the terminal includes: if the cell where the terminal resides is switched, sending the fifth indication information. That is, an event of a change in the cell where the UE resides triggers the UE to send the fifth indication information.
  • the positioning method further includes: if the camping cell of the terminal is switched and the terminal cannot perform at least one of the following operations, the terminal initiates random access to enter the connected state or sends a third indication information:
  • the terminal cannot send an uplink positioning reference signal
  • the terminal cannot measure the downlink positioning reference signal
  • the terminal cannot report location-related information
  • the third indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information of the positioning reference signal needs to be updated, and the positioning reference signal includes at least one of an uplink positioning reference signal and a downlink positioning reference signal.
  • the terminal when the terminal initiates random access to enter the connected state or sends the third indication information, the above reasons may be carried.
  • the reasons why the UE cannot send the uplink positioning reference signal, and/or measure the downlink positioning reference signal, and/or the UE reports the location-related information are as follows:
  • Changes in the IDRX configuration lead to changes in the behavior of the UE sending uplink positioning reference signals, measuring downlink positioning reference signals, or reporting positioning position-related information.
  • the UE instructs the camping cell to change to the serving gNB (or the camping gNB) and/or the location server. It is then sent by the serving gNB (or the resident gNB) and/or the location server to other gNBs participating in the positioning.
  • the terminal performing a positioning operation in an idle state or an inactive state further includes at least one of the following:
  • the terminal ignores the uplink positioning reference signal to be sent;
  • the terminal ignores the measurement of the downlink positioning reference signal
  • the terminal ignores the reporting of the location-related information
  • the terminal ignores the uplink positioning reference signal to be sent.
  • the X is indicated by a network side device, agreed in a protocol, or selected by the terminal.
  • the unit of X can be ms, s, or slot.
  • X is related to the IDRX cycle, such as half of the IDRX cycle, and so on.
  • the paging occasion is the paging occasion of the camped cell.
  • the gNB in the RNA area can send the IDRX configuration information to the location server in advance.
  • the IDRX configuration information includes but is not limited to: IDRX cycle, paging occasion location, paging frame location, UE's International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI), and the like.
  • IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity
  • the gNB Before sending the above information, the gNB receives a request from the location server to request the above IDRX configuration information.
  • the role of the location server to obtain the IDRX configuration information is as follows:
  • the auxiliary location server determines the auxiliary information for positioning, such as the PRS configuration, so that the PRS configuration and the IDRX configuration are more matched to save power consumption;
  • the IDRX configuration changes, which will cause the behavior of the UE to send uplink positioning reference signals, measure downlink positioning reference signals or report location-related information to change. If the network-side device knows the IDRX configuration in advance, once the network-side device knows that the UE has switched the camping cell, it can predict how the UE's behavior of sending uplink positioning reference signals, measuring downlink positioning reference signals, or reporting location-related information will change.
  • the location server can notify the neighboring cell gNB to release the SRS resources in some locations and reduce the waste of resources.
  • the handover of the camped cell results in that some SRS occasions can send SRS, then the location server can notify the neighboring cell gNB to receive these SRS occasions at a specific location.
  • the spatial relationship (spatial relation) of the uplink positioning reference signal is related to the downlink positioning reference signal. That is, the UE can use the beam that receives the downlink positioning reference signal of a certain TRP to send the uplink positioning reference signal to the TRP.
  • the UE receives the configuration of the uplink positioning reference signal.
  • at least one of the following configuration information in the configuration information can be recommended by the location server to the base station, and then configured by the base station to the UE: period, period offset, repeat configuration of uplink positioning reference signal, duration of one cycle of uplink positioning reference signal and many more.
  • the period of the uplink positioning reference signal may be configured as an integer multiple of the period of the downlink positioning reference signal.
  • the configuration information is used to match the downlink positioning reference signal as much as possible, so as to reduce the number of times the UE wakes up during downlink and uplink positioning, and save the power consumption of the UE.
  • the receiving and measuring the downlink positioning reference signal includes: receiving and measuring the downlink positioning reference signal according to the spatial beam relationship between the downlink positioning reference signal and the synchronization signal block SSB;
  • the spatial beam relationship between the downlink positioning reference signal and the synchronization signal block SSB is obtained from the spatial quasi co-location (Quasi Co-Location, QCL) relationship between the downlink positioning reference signal and the SSB indicated by the network side device; or, according to the downlink positioning reference
  • QCL spatial quasi co-location
  • the default relationship between the signal resource and the SSB actually sent in the synchronization signal block burst (SSB burst) under the TRP where the downlink positioning reference signal resource is located is obtained.
  • the PRS resource set contains N PRS resources, and the number of SSBs actually sent in the SSB burst is also N, so there is a one-to-one spatial relationship between PRS resources and SSBs.
  • the PRS resource of PRS resource ID 0 corresponds to the SSB with SSB index of 0
  • the PRS resource of PRS resource ID 1 corresponds to the SSB with SSB index of 1, ....
  • this application does not impose special restrictions on the PRS resource ID and the SSB index, and other corresponding relationships are also possible.
  • the N SSBs can be contiguous or non-contiguous, and which N SSBs in M can be specified by the protocol or by the network.
  • the spatial QCL relationship between the downlink positioning reference signal and a certain SSB may indicate that the downlink positioning reference signal and the SSB are sent from the same transmit beam.
  • the default relationship between the downlink positioning reference signal resource and the SSB actually sent in the synchronization signal block burst (SSB burst) under the TRP where the downlink positioning reference signal resource is located may be used in the broadcast positioning assistance data.
  • the configuration, activation and/or update in downlink and uplink positioning in idle state or active state are solved, so that downlink and uplink positioning in idle state or active state can be performed more effectively.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a positioning method, including:
  • the terminal performs a positioning operation in an idle state, an inactive state or a connected state, where the positioning operation includes:
  • Position-related information is reported, where the position-related information includes the correlation between the positioning measurement result and the time error group, and/or the correlation between the uplink positioning reference signal and the time error group.
  • the association relationship is used to assist the network-side device to perform positioning calculation, thereby reducing or eliminating the influence of the time error group on the positioning accuracy, and improving the positioning accuracy.
  • the relationship between the positioning measurement result and the Timing Error Group includes one of the following: the relationship between the positioning measurement result and the UE Rx TEG, the relationship between the positioning measurement result and the UE RxTx TEG, and the relationship between the positioning measurement result and ⁇ Rx TEG, Tx TEG ⁇ association.
  • the association between the uplink positioning reference signal and the time error group includes one of the following:
  • the measurement results and/or uplink positioning reference signals located in the same time error group have the same reception time error and/or transmission time error.
  • association relationship may be represented by the associated TEG identifier ID, or the downlink positioning reference signal measurement results and/or uplink positioning reference signals of the same TEG are grouped into one group, or represented in other ways.
  • the UE indicating the association between the uplink positioning reference signal and the time error group further includes: the UE may further indicate the change of the TEG associated with the uplink positioning reference signal (eg, SRS) to the network device.
  • the change of the TEG may be that the TEG associated with a certain SRS instance changes compared to the TEG associated with the previous SRS instance during the SRS transmission process, or it may be compared to the DL+UL positioning measurement.
  • Tx timing (or SRS) associated TEG has changed.
  • the association relationship between the uplink positioning reference signal and the time error group is included in the positioning measurement result.
  • Downlink and uplink positioning and positioning methods including but not limited to ECID, multi Round-Trip Time (multi-RTT) positioning methods, etc.
  • the UE may indicate the association between the positioning measurement result and the UE Rx TEG, and/or the association between the uplink positioning reference signal and the UE Tx TEG.
  • the time error may be the sum of the downlink measurement error and the uplink transmission error.
  • the UE may further indicate the association relationship between the Rx TEG and the Tx TEG (that is, the combination of the positioning measurement result and the SRS transmission) with the overall time error group (such as with the RxTx TEG) or the overall time error association relationship.
  • the UE indicates the relationship between the positioning measurement result and two Rx TEGs (Rx TEG0, Rx TEG1), and the relationship between the uplink positioning reference signal and two Tx TEGs (Tx TEG0, Tx TEG1).
  • the UE may further indicate the correlation between the two groups of Rx TEGs and the two groups of Tx TEGs combined with the overall TEG or the overall time error correlation. Different overall time error groups have different overall time error values.
  • Rx TEG0+Tx TEG0 and Rx TEG1+Tx TEG0 have the same overall error (or both overall errors are less than a certain threshold), or are in the same overall time error group 0; indicate that Rx TEG0+Tx TEG1 are in the overall time error group 1; Indicates that Rx TEG1+Tx TEG2 is in overall time error group 2.
  • the error values of the overall time error groups 0, 1, and 2 are different (or, it cannot be assumed that the errors of the overall time error groups 0, 1, and 2 are all smaller than a certain threshold).
  • the UE may indicate the association relationship between the measurement result (such as the Rx-Tx time difference) and the RxTx TEG.
  • the measurement result such as the Rx-Tx time difference
  • the RxTx TEG the association relationship between the measurement result (such as the Rx-Tx time difference) and the RxTx TEG.
  • the UE may indicate at least one group of ⁇ PRS resources, SRS resources ⁇ (the combination of PRS resources and SRS resources, or the combination of downlink positioning reference signal resources and uplink positioning reference signal resources), the above at least one group is located in the same in the RxTx TEG, or share the same RxTx TEG ID.
  • the PRS resources and SRS resources between different groups are not located in the same RxTx TEG (that is, the PRS resources of group A and the SRS resources of group B are not located in the same RxTx TEG).
  • PRS resources are used to determine the Rx time in the Rx-Tx time difference measurement
  • SRS resources are used to determine the Tx time in the Rx-Tx time difference measurement.
  • the UE may indicate one or more ⁇ PRS resources, SRS resources ⁇ groups including SRS resource(s)A , the change of RxTx TEG associated with SRS resource(s)A and all PRS resources (ie, 1 or more ⁇ PRS resources, SRS resource(s)A ⁇ combination) (for example, from RxTx TEG 0 to RxTx TEG1).
  • SRS resource(s)A is the SRS resource for which one or more TEGs have changed
  • the UE when the TEG (such as Rx TEG, or RxTx TEG) associated with PRS resource(s)A changes, the UE indicates that the PRS resource(s)A is included in one or more ⁇ PRS resources, SRS resources ⁇ groups. , the change of RxTx TEG associated with PRS resource(s)A and all SRS resources (that is, one or more ⁇ PRS resource(s)A, SRS resources ⁇ combinations) (for example, from RxTx TEG 0 to RxTx TEG2).
  • the change of RxTx TEG associated with PRS resource(s)A and all SRS resources that is, one or more ⁇ PRS resource(s)A, SRS resources ⁇ combinations
  • the UE reports the association relationship between the positioning measurement result and the time error group, and also includes at least one of the following methods:
  • the UE reports the correlation between the measurement results of multiple downlink positioning reference signal resources (PRS resources) under a certain TRP and the time error group (such as UE Rx TEG). Wherein, in the reported association relationship, each time error group is associated with at least one measurement result of the positioning reference signal resource.
  • PRS resources downlink positioning reference signal resources
  • the UE must report the measurement result and the association relationship of at least one positioning reference signal resource associated with the target time error group, where the target time error group is any one of multiple time error groups supported by the UE.
  • the first preset condition includes but is not limited to one of the following:
  • the quality of the measurement result of the downlink positioning reference signal resources associated with the target time error group exceeds a certain threshold; for example, the RSRP value of the first path exceeds a certain threshold;
  • the measurement result of the downlink positioning reference signal resource associated with the target time error group is the measurement result of Line of Sight (LOS), or the LOS probability of the measurement result of the downlink positioning reference signal resource associated with the target time error group is higher than a certain value. threshold;
  • the corresponding channel distributions of the downlink positioning reference signal resources associated with the multiple time error groups are similar, and the multiple time error groups are the target time error groups.
  • Channel distributions are similar, for example: power-delay spectrum distributions are similar (eg, the relative positions of multiple paths in the power-delay spectrum are similar or consistent).
  • the above UE behavior may be determined by at least one of network instruction, protocol agreement, and UE selection. For example, the network sets an 'enable' switch. When the 'enable' switch is indicated as 'on' (or present, or indicated as binary '1', etc.), the UE needs to follow the above UE behavior , otherwise the UE does not need to follow the above UE behavior.
  • the UE may report the measurement result and the association relationship of at least one positioning reference signal resource associated with the target time error group, and/or report multiple target time error groups.
  • the UE behavior may be determined by at least one of network instructions, protocol stipulations, and UE selection.
  • the UE may report the measurement result and association relationship of at least one positioning reference signal resource associated with the target time error group, and/or report the difference in time errors of multiple target time error groups, and/or the reported measurement
  • the difference in time errors of multiple mesh time error groups is compensated in the result.
  • the UE behavior may be determined by at least one of network instructions, protocol stipulations, and UE selection.
  • the UE reports the correlation between the measurement result of the target downlink positioning reference signal resource (PRS resource) under a certain TRP and multiple time error groups (such as UE Rx TEG).
  • PRS resource target downlink positioning reference signal resource
  • multiple time error groups such as UE Rx TEG.
  • the terminal reports the association relationship between the target positioning measurement result and multiple TEGs;
  • the second preset condition includes but is not limited to at least one of the following:
  • the quality of downlink positioning measurement results associated with multiple TEGs exceeds a certain threshold; for example, the RSRP value of the first path exceeds a certain threshold;
  • the downlink positioning measurement results associated with multiple TEGs are the LOS measurement results, or the LOS probability of the downlink positioning measurement results is higher than a certain threshold;
  • channels corresponding to multiple TEGs associated with the target positioning reference signal resource is similar.
  • Channel distributions are similar, for example: power-delay spectrum distributions are similar (eg, the relative positions of multiple paths in the power-delay spectrum are similar or consistent).
  • the above UE behavior may be determined by at least one of network instruction, protocol agreement, and UE selection. For example, the network sets an 'enable' switch. When the 'enable' switch is indicated as 'on' (or present, or indicated as binary '1', etc.), the UE needs to follow the above UE behavior , otherwise the UE does not need to follow the above UE behavior.
  • the UE may report the association relationship between the measurement results of multiple positioning reference signal resources and different time error groups, and/or report the measurement results of positioning reference signal resources that are different from each other.
  • the relationship between time error groups, and/or the difference of time errors of multiple time error groups reported, and/or the difference of time errors of multiple time error groups are compensated in the reported measurement results.
  • the UE behavior may be determined by at least one of network instructions, protocol stipulations, and UE selection.
  • the UE may report the association relationship between the measurement results of multiple positioning reference signal resources and different time error groups, and/or report the association relationship between the measurement results of the positioning reference signal resource and different time error groups, and/or report multiple The difference in time error of the time error group, and/or the difference in time error of the multiple time error groups compensated in the reported measurement result.
  • the UE behavior may be determined by at least one of network instructions, protocol stipulations, and UE selection.
  • the network device when the network device is a base station, after the base station (eg gNB) measures the uplink positioning reference signal, it also needs to report the uplink positioning measurement result to the location server (eg LMF).
  • the uplink positioning measurement result reported by the base station (such as gNB) also includes:
  • the association between the uplink positioning measurement results reported by the gNB and the time error group includes: the association between the measurement results of multiple uplink positioning reference signal resources (SRS resources) reported by the UE and the time error group (such as UE Tx TEG). Wherein, in the reported association relationship, each time error group (such as UE Tx TEG) is associated with at least one measurement result of uplink positioning reference signal resources.
  • the gNB When the third preset condition is met, the gNB must report the measurement result and association relationship of at least one uplink positioning reference signal resource associated with the target time error group.
  • the target time error group is a plurality of time error groups supported by the UE (such as UE Tx TEG ) any of them.
  • the third preset condition includes but is not limited to one of the following:
  • the quality of the measurement result of the uplink positioning reference signal resources associated with the target time error group exceeds a certain threshold; for example, the RSRP value of the first path exceeds a certain threshold;
  • the measurement result of the uplink positioning reference signal resource associated with the target time error group is the measurement result of the line-of-sight path LOS, or the LOS probability of the measurement result of the downlink positioning reference signal resource associated with the target time error group is higher than a certain threshold;
  • Corresponding channel distributions of uplink positioning reference signal resources associated with multiple time error groups are similar, and the multiple time error groups are target time error groups.
  • Channel distributions are similar, for example: power-delay spectrum distributions are similar (eg, the relative positions of multiple paths in the power-delay spectrum are similar or consistent).
  • the above-mentioned gNB behavior may be determined by at least one of network (eg, LMF) instruction, protocol agreement, and gNB implementation.
  • network eg, LMF
  • the network sets an 'enable' switch.
  • the 'enable' switch is indicated as 'on' (or present, or indicated as binary '1', etc.)
  • the gNB needs to follow the The above behavior, otherwise the gNB does not need to follow the above UE behavior.
  • the gNB may report the measurement result and the association relationship of at least one uplink positioning reference signal resource associated with the target time error group, and/or report multiple target time errors.
  • the difference of the time errors of the groups, and/or the difference of the time errors of the multiple mesh time error groups are compensated in the reported measurement results.
  • the gNB behavior may be determined by at least one of network indication, protocol agreement, and UE selection.
  • the gNB may report the measurement result and association relationship of at least one uplink positioning reference signal resource associated with the target time error group, and/or report the difference in time errors of multiple target time error groups, and/or Compensate the difference in time error of multiple mesh time error groups in the measurement result.
  • the gNB behavior may be determined by at least one of network indication, protocol agreement, and UE selection.
  • the above-mentioned first/second/third preset conditions may be determined by at least one of network indication, protocol agreement, UE/base station selection.
  • Embodiment 1 of the present application is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 1 of the present application:
  • This embodiment provides a process for a network side device to initiate a positioning reference signal configuration update, including the following steps:
  • Step 1 In the on-demand PRS configuration, the LMF needs to update the on-demand PRS configuration information to multiple UEs, including UEs in the connected state and multiple UEs in the idle or inactive state.
  • Step 2 The LMF sends the On-demand request information to the AMF, and the AMF sends it to a certain gNB.
  • Step 3 The gNB judges whether the size of the requested information exceeds the threshold, and if it does not exceed the threshold, skip to Step 4. If the threshold is exceeded, the process of the UE entering the connected state is initiated.
  • Step 4 The gNB sends a paging message carrying the positioning reference signal configuration update.
  • Paging can be RAN-paging or SA-paging (core network paging).
  • Step 5 The UE receives a positioning reference signal configuration update indication, including: positioning reference signal update and an indication that it does not need to enter the connected state.
  • Step 6 The UE needs to feedback that it has received the positioning reference signal configuration update by means of the uplink SDT.
  • the uplink SDT is carried in the RRCresumerequest message, and the resumecause in the RRCresumerequest carries 'positioning reference signal configuration update feedback', indicating that the uplink SDT
  • the process is initiated for feedback of positioning reference signal configuration update.
  • Step 7 The gNB receives the feedback in the SDT of the UE, carries the updated positioning reference signal configuration through the RRC release message, and sends it to the UE.
  • Embodiment 2 of this application is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 2 of this application:
  • This embodiment presents an implementation of aperiodic SRS transmission.
  • Mode 1 The UE sends a request to the gNB.
  • Step 1 The UE monitors the occurrence of an event, such as the occurrence of an action event or an area event, and the event triggers the UE to initiate a request for aperiodic SRS transmission.
  • an event such as the occurrence of an action event or an area event
  • Step 2 The UE sends an aperiodic SRS request to the gNB through RA-SDT, and the request carries the reason: such as event information and/or uplink positioning request and/or aperiodic SRS sending request.
  • Step 3 After receiving the request from the UE, the gNB initiates the aperiodic SRS triggering process if the aperiodic SRS can be triggered, otherwise, skip to step 4.
  • the gNB sends the PDCCH to the UE to trigger the aperiodic SRS.
  • the gNB sends aperiodic SRS related information (such as aperiodic SRS sending time) to the location server (through NRPPa), and then the location server sends aperiodic SRS related information to other gNBs participating in positioning. Alternatively, the gNB sends aperiodic SRS related information to other gNBs participating in positioning (eg, through Xn) interface.
  • aperiodic SRS related information such as aperiodic SRS sending time
  • the location server sends aperiodic SRS related information to other gNBs participating in positioning.
  • the gNB sends aperiodic SRS related information to other gNBs participating in positioning (eg, through Xn) interface.
  • Step 4 The gNB sends a response to the UE, including the information that the aperiodic SRS cannot be triggered, and the response can be carried by the RRC release message.
  • Mode 2 The UE sends a request to the location server LMF.
  • Step 1 The UE monitors the occurrence of an event, such as the occurrence of an action event or an area event, and the event triggers the UE to initiate a request for aperiodic SRS transmission.
  • an event such as the occurrence of an action event or an area event
  • Step 2 The UE sends an aperiodic SRS request to the location server LMF through the RA-SDT, and the request carries the reason: such as event information and/or uplink positioning request and/or aperiodic SRS sending request.
  • Step 3 The LMF receives the request from the UE, and sends the request to the gNB through NRPPa.
  • Step 4 If the gNB can trigger the aperiodic SRS, it initiates the aperiodic SRS triggering process. Otherwise, skip to 5 or 6.
  • 4.1 gNB sends PDCCH to UE to trigger aperiodic SRS.
  • the gNB sends aperiodic SRS related information (such as aperiodic SRS sending time) to the location server (through NRPPa), and then the location server sends aperiodic SRS related information to other gNBs participating in positioning. Alternatively, the gNB sends aperiodic SRS related information to other gNBs participating in positioning (eg, through Xn) interface.
  • aperiodic SRS related information such as aperiodic SRS sending time
  • the location server sends aperiodic SRS related information to other gNBs participating in positioning.
  • the gNB sends aperiodic SRS related information to other gNBs participating in positioning (eg, through Xn) interface.
  • Step 5 The gNB sends a response to the location server, including the information that the aperiodic SRS cannot be triggered, and the response can be carried by the NRPPa message.
  • the location server sends the corresponding to the UE.
  • This message can be an LPP message, carried by the RRC release message.
  • Step 6 The gNB sends a response to the UE, including the information that the aperiodic SRS cannot be triggered, and the response can be carried by the RRC release message.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a positioning method, including:
  • Step 71 The network-side device performs a positioning operation, where performing the positioning operation includes at least one of the following:
  • the network side device may be a base station or a location server.
  • the network device when it is a base station, it may send a downlink positioning reference signal to the terminal, and/or receive an uplink positioning reference signal, and/or receive location-related information reported by the terminal.
  • the base station may further send the location-related information reported by the terminal to the location server (for example, the location-related information is transparently transmitted by the base station and finally reaches the location server).
  • the base station after receiving or measuring the uplink positioning reference signal, the base station may also send the measurement result of the uplink positioning reference signal to the location server.
  • the base station may be one of a serving base station (or a serving cell base station), a neighboring base station (or a neighboring cell base station), and a camping cell base station.
  • the network device when the network device is a location server, it can receive the location-related information reported by the terminal and/or the measurement result of the uplink positioning reference signal measured by the base station.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network-side device sends first indication information to the terminal in an idle state or an inactive state, where the first indication information includes at least one of the following:
  • the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the following: the uplink positioning reference signal and the downlink positioning reference signal.
  • the update information of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the following:
  • the configuration information used to indicate whether the positioning reference signal has updated indication information or the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the following:
  • the spatial relationship configuration of the positioning reference signal is changed
  • the path loss configuration of the positioning reference signal changes.
  • the positioning reference signal indicated by the first indication information is one of the following granularities:
  • the first indication information is carried in at least one of the following manners:
  • the first indication information is represented by the bits of the short message in the paging PDCCH, or represented by the reserved bits in the paging PDCCH.
  • whether the configuration information of the positioning reference signal has updated indication information is carried in the paging PDCCH, and the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal is carried in the paging PDSCH scheduled by the paging PDCCH.
  • the first indication information further includes indication information of whether to enter a connected state and update the configuration information of the positioning reference signal.
  • the network side device after the network side device sends the first indication information to the terminal in the idle state or the inactive state, it further includes:
  • the network side device receives the first feedback information sent by the terminal, where the first feedback information is used to indicate that the first indication information has been received.
  • the first feedback information includes at least one of the following:
  • the feedback reasons include at least one of the following: feedback of the availability indication of the positioning reference signal, feedback of updating the configuration information of the positioning reference signal, and feedback of updating the configuration information of the positioning reference signal initiated by the network side device ;
  • the update response of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal where the update response is used to respond to whether the configuration information of the positioning reference signal in the first indication information has updated indication information.
  • the network-side device after receiving the first feedback information sent by the terminal, the network-side device further includes:
  • the network side device sends the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal to the terminal.
  • the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal is carried in one of the following ways:
  • the location-related information includes: second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate subsequent data transmission information, and the subsequent data transmission information includes at least one of the following:
  • the type of data to be transmitted subsequently includes at least one of the following: positioning-related data or non-positioning-related data, control plane data or user plane data, signaling radio bearer, non-access stratum or data radio bearer data.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network side device receives subsequent data to be transmitted on the PUSCH scheduled by the PDCCH configured by the network side device.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network side device receives third indication information sent by the terminal, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information of the positioning reference signal needs to be updated, and the positioning reference signal includes an uplink positioning reference signal and a downlink positioning reference signal. at least one.
  • the third indication information further includes: a reason for sending the third indication information, and the reason includes at least one of the following: the updating of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal initiated by the terminal, the Update of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal, the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is not available.
  • the positioning reference signal indicated by the third indication information is one of the following granularities:
  • One or more sets of positioning reference signals under the configuration information of the positioning reference signals are One or more sets of positioning reference signals under the configuration information of the positioning reference signals
  • the third indication information further includes at least one of the following:
  • the measurement result includes at least one of the following: a reference signal identifier, the measurement result of the N best beams above the threshold, the indication of the N best beams above the threshold, and the measurement of the best beam
  • the best beam indication is the first to reach the measurement results of the N beams with the strongest RSRP, the first to reach the N beams with the strongest RSRP indication, and N is specified by the protocol, indicated by the network side device or selected by the terminal.
  • the network-side device further includes:
  • the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the following: the uplink positioning reference signal and the downlink positioning reference signal.
  • the location-related information includes: measurement information, where the measurement information includes at least one of the following:
  • the measurement information is periodically reported by the terminal.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network side device sends the reporting configuration of the measurement information to the terminal, and the reporting configuration includes at least one of the following:
  • the cell identity associated with performing RRM measurements is the cell identity associated with performing RRM measurements.
  • the reporting configuration of the measurement information is carried in at least one of the following ways:
  • the uplink positioning reference signal includes: aperiodic SRS or semi-persistent SRS.
  • the method before receiving the aperiodic SRS, the method further includes:
  • the PDCCH and/or aperiodic SRS scrambled by the C-RNTI are sent before the RRC release message after the contention is successfully resolved.
  • the semi-persistent SRS before receiving the semi-persistent SRS, it further includes:
  • the activation information is sent through the PDSCH scheduled by the network side device to activate the terminal to send the semi-persistent SRS;
  • the PDSCH and/or the semi-persistent SRS scheduled by the network side device is received before the RRC release message after the contention is successfully resolved.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network-side device receives request information sent by the terminal in an SDT manner, where the request information is used to request the network-side device to trigger an aperiodic SRS or activate a semi-persistent SRS, and the request information includes at least one of the following:
  • Aperiodic SRS trigger request or semi-persistent SRS activation request
  • the method further includes:
  • the network-side device receives fourth indication information sent by the terminal, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a timing change of the uplink positioning reference signal.
  • the fourth indication information further includes:
  • the reason that causes the timing of the uplink positioning reference signal to change, and the reasons include at least one of the following: cell handover or cell reselection of the terminal to camp on, the terminal automatically adjusts the timing of the uplink positioning reference signal, the terminal receives the camping reference signal timing Timing advance command for the cell.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network-side device receives fifth indication information sent by the terminal, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate a change in the camping cell.
  • the fifth indication information further includes identification information of the camping cell.
  • the location-related information reported by the terminal receiving the idle state or the inactive state includes:
  • the association relationship between the uplink positioning reference signal and the time error group is included in the positioning measurement result.
  • the execution body may be a positioning device, or a control module in the positioning device for executing the positioning method.
  • the positioning device provided by the embodiment of the present application is described by taking the positioning device executing the positioning method as an example.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a positioning method, including:
  • Performing a positioning operation includes:
  • Receive location-related information reported by a terminal in an idle or inactive state where the location-related information includes the correlation between the positioning measurement result and the time error group, and/or the correlation between the uplink positioning reference signal and the time error group.
  • association relationship is used to assist the network side device to perform positioning calculation, thereby reducing or eliminating the influence of the time error group on the positioning accuracy, and improving the positioning accuracy.
  • the association relationship between the uplink positioning reference signal and the time error group is included in the positioning measurement result.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a positioning device 80, including:
  • the positioning module 81 is configured to perform a positioning operation in an idle state or an inactive state, wherein performing the positioning operation includes at least one of the following:
  • the positioning device 80 further includes:
  • a first receiving module configured to receive first indication information in an idle state or an inactive state, where the first indication information includes at least one of the following:
  • the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the following: the uplink positioning reference signal and the downlink positioning reference signal.
  • the positioning device 80 further includes:
  • a first execution module configured to assume that the positioning reference signal does not exist if the first indication information indicates that the positioning reference signal is unavailable, or the positioning reference signal is not sent, or the positioning reference signal is stopped sending, or not sending the positioning reference signal, or stopping sending the positioning reference signal;
  • the second execution module is configured to, if the first indication information indicates that the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is unavailable, assuming that the positioning reference signal corresponding to the configuration information of the positioning reference signal does not exist, or the positioning reference signal is not available.
  • the positioning reference signal corresponding to the configuration information is not sent, or the positioning reference signal corresponding to the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is stopped, or the positioning reference signal corresponding to the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is not sent, or the positioning reference signal corresponding to the configuration information is stopped.
  • the positioning reference signal corresponding to the configuration information of the reference signal is not sent, or the positioning reference signal corresponding to the configuration information of the reference signal.
  • the update information of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the following:
  • the configuration information used to indicate whether the positioning reference signal has updated indication information or the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the following:
  • the spatial relationship configuration of the positioning reference signal is changed
  • the path loss configuration of the positioning reference signal changes.
  • the positioning reference signal indicated by the first indication information is one of the following granularities:
  • receiving the first indication information in an idle state or an inactive state includes at least one of the following:
  • the first indication information is obtained from the downlink scheduling resource PDSCH configured by the network side device.
  • the first indication information is represented by the bits of the short message in the paging PDCCH, or represented by the reserved bits in the paging PDCCH.
  • whether the configuration information of the positioning reference signal has updated indication information is obtained in the paging PDCCH, and the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal is obtained in the paging PDSCH scheduled by the paging PDCCH.
  • the first indication information further includes indication information of whether to enter a connected state and update the configuration information of the positioning reference signal.
  • the positioning device 80 further includes:
  • the first initiating module is configured to, if the first indication information includes the indication information for entering the connected state and update the configuration information of the positioning reference signal, or the first indication information does not include not entering the connected state to update the The indication information of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal, initiate random access to enter the connected state and update the configuration information of the positioning reference signal.
  • the positioning device 80 further includes:
  • a first sending module configured to send first feedback information, where the first feedback information is used to indicate that the first indication information has been received.
  • the first feedback information is sent in an idle state or an inactive state or after the terminal enters a connected state.
  • the first feedback information includes at least one of the following:
  • the feedback reasons include at least one of the following: feedback of the availability indication of the positioning reference signal, feedback of updating the configuration information of the positioning reference signal, and feedback of updating the configuration information of the positioning reference signal initiated by the network side device ;
  • the update response of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal where the update response is used to respond to whether the configuration information of the positioning reference signal in the first indication information has updated indication information.
  • the positioning apparatus 80 further includes: a second receiving module, configured to receive the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal.
  • receiving the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal includes one of the following ways:
  • the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal is received.
  • the positioning device 80 further includes:
  • the third execution module is configured to, if the terminal is configured with the initial downlink BWP, the terminal to execute one of the following:
  • the terminal does not receive the downlink positioning reference signal, and the first signal includes at least one of the following: SIB1, except for the SIB1 Other SIBs other than Msg2, MSg4, MsgB, PDCCH, SSB scheduling SIB1;
  • the terminal performs BWP handover according to an instruction of a network side device, a protocol agreement or a selection of the terminal, and receives the downlink positioning reference signal on the BWP after the handover.
  • the location-related information includes: second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate subsequent data transmission information, and the subsequent data transmission information includes at least one of the following:
  • the type of subsequent data to be transmitted includes at least one of the following: positioning-related data or non-positioning-related data, control plane data or user plane data, signaling radio bearer, non-access stratum or data radio bearer data.
  • the positioning apparatus 80 further includes: a second sending module, configured to transmit subsequent data to be transmitted on the PUSCH scheduled by the PDCCH configured by the network side device.
  • a second sending module configured to transmit subsequent data to be transmitted on the PUSCH scheduled by the PDCCH configured by the network side device.
  • the PDCCH configured by the network side device carries a type indication of the scheduled uplink data; transmitting subsequent data to be transmitted on the PUSCH scheduled by the PDCCH configured by the network side device includes: the PUSCH scheduled by the PDCCH configured by the network side device.
  • the subsequent data to be transmitted corresponding to the type indicated by the type indication is transmitted.
  • the positioning device 80 further includes:
  • the third sending module is configured to send third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information of the positioning reference signal needs to be updated, and the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the uplink positioning reference signal and the downlink positioning reference signal one.
  • the third indication information is sent in an SDT manner or sent after the terminal enters a connected state.
  • the third indication information further includes: a reason for sending the third indication information, and the reason includes at least one of the following: the updating of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal initiated by the terminal, the Update of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal, the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is not available.
  • the positioning reference signal indicated by the third indication information is one of the following granularities:
  • One or more sets of positioning reference signals under the configuration information of the positioning reference signals are One or more sets of positioning reference signals under the configuration information of the positioning reference signals
  • the third indication information further includes at least one of the following:
  • the measurement result includes at least one of the following: a reference signal identifier, the measurement result of the N best beams above the threshold, the indication of the N best beams above the threshold, and the measurement of the best beam
  • the best beam indication is the first to reach the measurement results of the N beams with the strongest RSRP, the first to reach the N beams with the strongest RSRP indication, and N is specified by the protocol, indicated by the network side device or selected by the terminal.
  • sending the third indication information includes:
  • the terminal sends third indication information when at least one of the following conditions is met:
  • the terminal If the terminal detects that the adjustment of the tracking area exceeds the first tracking area threshold, and the terminal does not enter the connected state, sending the third indication information;
  • the terminal If the terminal detects that the difference between the two first measurement values before and after exceeds the first measurement threshold, and the terminal does not enter the connected state, it sends the third indication information, where the first measurement value includes at least one of the following: Measurement information of SSB, measurement information of paging or Msg2 or Msg4 or MsgB, measurement information of the positioning reference signal;
  • the cell where the terminal resides is switched, and the downlink positioning reference signal cannot be received, the location-related information cannot be reported, or the uplink positioning reference signal cannot be sent, sending the third indication information;
  • the third indication information is sent.
  • the preconfigured area where the configuration information of the positioning reference signal takes effect is a certain cell, a certain cell list, or an area covered by a certain or certain SSBs.
  • the positioning device 80 further includes:
  • the third receiving module is configured to receive first indication information in an idle state or an inactive state, and the first indication information includes at least one of the following:
  • the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the following: the uplink positioning reference signal and the downlink positioning reference signal.
  • the positioning device 80 further includes:
  • the fourth receiving module is configured to start a third timer after sending the third indication information, and receive the first indication information before the third timer times out.
  • the reported location-related information includes:
  • the measurement information includes at least one of the following:
  • the measurement information is reported in an SDT manner.
  • the measurement information is reported periodically.
  • the positioning device 80 further includes:
  • a fifth receiving module configured to receive a reporting configuration of the measurement information, where the reporting configuration includes at least one of the following:
  • the cell identity associated with performing RRM measurements is the cell identity associated with performing RRM measurements.
  • the reporting configuration for receiving the measurement information includes at least one of the following:
  • the reporting configuration of the measurement information is obtained in the RRC release message.
  • the uplink positioning reference signal includes: aperiodic SRS or semi-persistent SRS.
  • sending the aperiodic SRS includes at least one of the following:
  • the aperiodic SRS is triggered and sent by the PDCCH scrambled by the C-RNTI;
  • sending the semi-persistent SRS includes at least one of the following:
  • the semi-persistent SRS is activated and sent by the PDSCH scheduled by the network side device;
  • the PDSCH and/or the semi-persistent SRS scheduled by the network side device are received before the RRC release message after the contention is successfully resolved.
  • the positioning device 80 further includes:
  • the fourth sending module is configured to send request information by means of SDT, where the request information is used to request the network side device to trigger the aperiodic SRS or activate the semi-persistent SRS, and the request information includes at least one of the following:
  • Aperiodic SRS trigger request or semi-persistent SRS activation request
  • sending the request information by means of SDT includes:
  • the request information is sent by means of SDT, and the event includes at least one of the following: an area event and an action event.
  • the positioning device 80 further includes:
  • the fifth sending module is configured to send fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the timing change of the uplink positioning reference signal.
  • sending the fourth indication information includes one of the following:
  • the fourth indication information further includes:
  • the reason that causes the timing of the uplink positioning reference signal to change, and the reasons include at least one of the following: cell handover or cell reselection of the terminal to camp on, the terminal automatically adjusts the timing of the uplink positioning reference signal, the terminal receives the camping reference signal timing Timing advance command for the cell.
  • sending the fourth indication information includes: when at least one of the following conditions is met, sending the fourth indication information: the terminal is camped on cell handover or cell reselection, and the terminal automatically adjusts the uplink positioning reference Signal timing, the terminal receives the Timing advance command of the camped cell.
  • the positioning apparatus 80 further includes: a sixth sending module, configured to send fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate a change of the camping cell.
  • sending the fifth indication information includes one of the following:
  • the fifth indication information further includes identification information of the camping cell.
  • sending the fifth indication information includes:
  • the fifth indication information is sent.
  • the positioning device 80 further includes:
  • the second initiating module is configured to initiate random access to enter the connected state or send third indication information if the cell where the terminal resides is switched and the terminal cannot perform at least one of the following operations:
  • the terminal cannot send an uplink positioning reference signal
  • the terminal cannot measure the downlink positioning reference signal
  • the terminal cannot report location-related information
  • the third indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information of the positioning reference signal needs to be updated, and the positioning reference signal includes at least one of an uplink positioning reference signal and a downlink positioning reference signal.
  • performing the positioning operation in the idle state or the inactive state further includes at least one of the following:
  • the terminal ignores the uplink positioning reference signal to be sent;
  • the terminal ignores the measurement of the downlink positioning reference signal
  • the terminal ignores the reporting of the location-related information
  • the terminal ignores the uplink positioning reference signal to be sent.
  • the paging occasion is the paging occasion of the camped cell.
  • reporting the location-related information includes: reporting the association relationship between the positioning measurement result and the time error group, and/or the association relationship between the uplink positioning reference signal and the time error group.
  • the association relationship between the uplink positioning reference signal and the time error group is included in the positioning measurement result.
  • the receiving and measuring the downlink positioning reference signal includes: receiving and measuring the downlink positioning reference signal according to the spatial beam relationship between the downlink positioning reference signal and the synchronization signal block SSB;
  • the spatial beam relationship between the downlink positioning reference signal and the synchronization signal block SSB is obtained from the spatial QCL relationship between the downlink positioning reference signal and the SSB indicated by the network side device; or, according to the TRP where the downlink positioning reference signal resources and the downlink positioning reference signal resources are located.
  • the default relationship of the SSB actually sent in the lower synchronization signal block burst is obtained.
  • the positioning device in this embodiment of the present application may be a device, a device with an operating system, or an electronic device, or may be a component, an integrated circuit, or a chip in a terminal.
  • the apparatus or electronic device may be a mobile terminal or a non-mobile terminal.
  • the mobile terminal may include but is not limited to the types of terminals 11 listed above, and the non-mobile terminal may be a server, a network attached storage (Network Attached Storage, NAS), a personal computer (Personal Computer, PC), a television ( Television, TV), teller machine, or self-service machine, etc., which are not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the positioning device provided in the embodiment of the present application can implement each process implemented by the method embodiment of FIG. 6 , and achieve the same technical effect. To avoid repetition, details are not repeated here.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a positioning device 90, including:
  • the positioning module 91 is configured to perform a positioning operation, wherein performing the positioning operation includes at least one of the following:
  • the positioning device 90 further includes:
  • a first sending module configured to send first indication information to a terminal in an idle state or an inactive state, where the first indication information includes at least one of the following:
  • the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the following: the uplink positioning reference signal and the downlink positioning reference signal.
  • the update information of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the following:
  • the configuration information used to indicate whether the positioning reference signal has updated indication information or the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the following:
  • the spatial relationship configuration of the positioning reference signal is changed
  • the path loss configuration of the positioning reference signal changes.
  • the positioning reference signal indicated by the first indication information is one of the following granularities:
  • the first indication information is carried in at least one of the following ways:
  • the first indication information is represented by the bits of the short message in the paging PDCCH, or represented by the reserved bits in the paging PDCCH.
  • whether the configuration information of the positioning reference signal has updated indication information is carried in the paging PDCCH, and the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal is carried in the paging PDSCH scheduled by the paging PDCCH.
  • the first indication information further includes indication information of whether to enter a connected state and update the configuration information of the positioning reference signal.
  • the positioning device 90 further includes:
  • a first receiving module configured to receive first feedback information sent by the terminal, where the first feedback information is used to indicate that the first indication information has been received.
  • the first feedback information includes at least one of the following:
  • the feedback reasons include at least one of the following: feedback of the availability indication of the positioning reference signal, feedback of updating the configuration information of the positioning reference signal, and feedback of updating the configuration information of the positioning reference signal initiated by the network side device ;
  • the update response of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal where the update response is used to respond to whether the configuration information of the positioning reference signal in the first indication information has updated indication information.
  • the positioning device 90 further includes:
  • the second sending module is configured to send the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal to the terminal.
  • the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal is carried in one of the following ways:
  • the location-related information includes: second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate subsequent data transmission information, and the subsequent data transmission information includes at least one of the following:
  • the type of data to be transmitted subsequently includes at least one of the following: positioning-related data or non-positioning-related data, control plane data or user plane data, signaling radio bearer, non-access stratum or data radio bearer data.
  • the positioning device 90 further includes:
  • the second receiving module is configured to receive subsequent data to be transmitted on the PUSCH scheduled by the PDCCH configured by the network side device.
  • the positioning device 90 further includes:
  • a third receiving module configured to receive third indication information sent by the terminal, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information of the positioning reference signal needs to be updated, and the positioning reference signal includes an uplink positioning reference signal and a downlink positioning reference signal at least one of them.
  • the third indication information further includes: a reason for sending the third indication information, and the reason includes at least one of the following: the updating of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal initiated by the terminal, the Update of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal, the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is not available.
  • the positioning reference signal indicated by the third indication information is one of the following granularities:
  • One or more sets of positioning reference signals under the configuration information of the positioning reference signals are One or more sets of positioning reference signals under the configuration information of the positioning reference signals
  • the third indication information further includes at least one of the following:
  • the measurement result includes at least one of the following: a reference signal identifier, the measurement result of the N best beams above the threshold, the indication of the N best beams above the threshold, and the measurement of the best beam
  • the best beam indication is the first to reach the measurement results of the N beams with the strongest RSRP, the first to reach the N beams with the strongest RSRP indication, and N is specified by the protocol, indicated by the network side device or selected by the terminal.
  • the positioning device 90 further includes:
  • a third sending module configured to send first indication information to the terminal, where the first indication information includes at least one of the following:
  • the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the following: the uplink positioning reference signal and the downlink positioning reference signal.
  • the location-related information includes: measurement information, where the measurement information includes at least one of the following:
  • the measurement information is periodically reported by the terminal.
  • the positioning device further includes:
  • a fourth sending module configured to send a reporting configuration of the measurement information to the terminal, where the reporting configuration includes at least one of the following:
  • the cell identity associated with performing RRM measurements is the cell identity associated with performing RRM measurements.
  • the reporting configuration of the measurement information is carried in at least one of the following ways:
  • the uplink positioning reference signal includes: aperiodic SRS or semi-persistent SRS.
  • the positioning device further includes:
  • a fifth sending module configured to send trigger information to the terminal through the PDCCH scrambled by the C-RNTI, so as to trigger the terminal to send the aperiodic SRS;
  • the PDCCH and/or aperiodic SRS scrambled by the C-RNTI are sent before the RRC release message after the contention is successfully resolved.
  • the positioning device 90 further includes:
  • a sixth sending module configured to send activation information through the PDSCH scheduled by the network side device to activate the terminal to send the semi-persistent SRS;
  • the PDSCH and/or the semi-persistent SRS scheduled by the network side device is received before the RRC release message after the contention is successfully resolved.
  • the positioning device 90 further includes:
  • the third receiving module is configured to receive request information sent by the terminal in an SDT manner, where the request information is used to request the network side device to trigger an aperiodic SRS or activate a semi-persistent SRS, and the request information includes at least one of the following:
  • Aperiodic SRS trigger request or semi-persistent SRS activation request
  • the positioning device 90 further includes:
  • the fourth receiving module is configured to receive fourth indication information sent by the terminal, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the timing change of the uplink positioning reference signal.
  • the fourth indication information further includes:
  • the reason that causes the timing of the uplink positioning reference signal to change, and the reasons include at least one of the following: cell handover or cell reselection of the terminal to camp on, the terminal automatically adjusts the timing of the uplink positioning reference signal, the terminal receives the camping reference signal timing Timing advance command for the cell.
  • the positioning device 90 further includes:
  • the fifth receiving module is configured to receive fifth indication information sent by the terminal, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate a change of the camping cell.
  • the fifth indication information further includes identification information of the camping cell.
  • the location-related information reported by the terminal receiving the idle state or the inactive state includes:
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a positioning device, including:
  • the positioning module is used to perform a positioning operation in an idle state, an inactive state or a connected state, wherein the positioning operation includes:
  • Position-related information is reported, where the position-related information includes the correlation between the positioning measurement result and the time error group, and/or the correlation between the uplink positioning reference signal and the time error group.
  • the association relationship is used to assist the network-side device to perform positioning calculation, thereby reducing or eliminating the influence of the time error group on the positioning accuracy, and improving the positioning accuracy.
  • the association relationship between the uplink positioning reference signal and the time error group is included in the positioning measurement result.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a positioning device, including:
  • the positioning module is used to perform a positioning operation, wherein the positioning operation includes:
  • Receive location-related information reported by a terminal in an idle or inactive state where the location-related information includes the correlation between the positioning measurement result and the time error group, and/or the correlation between the uplink positioning reference signal and the time error group.
  • the association relationship is used to assist the network-side device to perform positioning calculation, thereby reducing or eliminating the influence of the time error group on the positioning accuracy, and improving the positioning accuracy.
  • the association relationship between the uplink positioning reference signal and the time error group is included in the positioning measurement result.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device 100, including a processor 101, a memory 102, and a program or instruction stored in the memory 102 and executed on the processor 101.
  • a communication device 100 including a processor 101, a memory 102, and a program or instruction stored in the memory 102 and executed on the processor 101.
  • the communication When the device 100 is a terminal, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor 101, each process of the above-mentioned embodiment of the positioning method executed by the terminal can be realized, and the same technical effect can be achieved.
  • the communication device 100 is a network-side device, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor 101, each process of the above-mentioned embodiment of the positioning method executed by the network-side device can be realized, and the same technical effect can be achieved. Repeat.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a terminal, including a processor and a communication interface, where the processor is used for the terminal to perform a positioning operation in an idle state or an inactive state, where performing the positioning operation includes at least one of the following: receiving and measuring a downlink positioning reference signal ; report location-related information; send uplink positioning reference signals.
  • This terminal embodiment corresponds to the above-mentioned terminal-side method embodiment, and each implementation process and implementation manner of the above-mentioned method embodiment can be applied to this terminal embodiment, and can achieve the same technical effect.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a terminal implementing an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal 110 includes but is not limited to: a radio frequency unit 111, a network module 112, an audio output unit 113, an input unit 114, a sensor 115, a display unit 116, a user input unit 117, an interface unit 118, a memory 119, and a processor 1110, etc. at least part of the components.
  • the terminal 110 may also include a power source (such as a battery) for supplying power to various components, and the power source may be logically connected to the processor 1110 through a power management system, so as to manage charging, discharging, and power consumption through the power management system management and other functions.
  • a power source such as a battery
  • the terminal structure shown in FIG. 11 does not constitute a limitation on the terminal, and the terminal may include more or less components than shown, or combine some components, or arrange different components, which will not be repeated here.
  • the input unit 114 may include a graphics processor (Graphics Processing Unit, GPU) 1141 and a microphone 1142, and the graphics processor 1141 is used to communicate with the image capture device (such as camera) to obtain still pictures or video image data for processing.
  • the display unit 116 may include a display panel 1161, which may be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display, an organic light emitting diode, or the like.
  • the user input unit 117 includes a touch panel 1171 and other input devices 1172 .
  • the touch panel 1171 is also called a touch screen.
  • the touch panel 1171 may include two parts, a touch detection device and a touch controller.
  • Other input devices 1172 may include, but are not limited to, physical keyboards, function keys (such as volume control keys, switch keys, etc.), trackballs, mice, and joysticks, which are not described herein again.
  • the radio frequency unit 111 receives the downlink data from the network side device, and then processes it to the processor 1110; in addition, sends the uplink data to the network side device.
  • the radio frequency unit 111 includes, but is not limited to, an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a low noise amplifier, a duplexer, and the like.
  • Memory 119 may be used to store software programs or instructions as well as various data.
  • the memory 119 may mainly include a storage program or instruction area and a storage data area, wherein the stored program or instruction area may store an operating system, an application program or instruction required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.) and the like.
  • the memory 119 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, wherein the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), a programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM) , PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • ROM Read-Only Memory
  • PROM programmable read-only memory
  • PROM erasable programmable read-only memory
  • Erasable PROM Erasable PROM
  • EPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
  • EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
  • flash memory for example at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, or other non-volatile solid state storage device.
  • the processor 1110 may include one or more processing units; optionally, the processor 1110 may integrate an application processor and a modem processor, wherein the application processor mainly processes the operating system, user interface, and application programs or instructions, etc. Modem processors mainly deal with wireless communications, such as baseband processors. It can be understood that, the above-mentioned modulation and demodulation processor may not be integrated into the processor 1110.
  • the processor 1110 is used for the terminal to perform a positioning operation in an idle state or an inactive state, wherein performing the positioning operation includes at least one of the following:
  • the positioning function is performed in the RRC inactive state or the RRC idle state, so as to ensure the positioning performance and low power consumption.
  • the radio frequency module 111 is configured to receive first indication information in an idle state or an inactive state, where the first indication information includes at least one of the following:
  • the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the following: the uplink positioning reference signal and the downlink positioning reference signal.
  • the radio frequency module 111 is configured to, if the first indication information indicates that the positioning reference signal is unavailable, the terminal assumes that the positioning reference signal does not exist, or the positioning reference signal is not sent, or the positioning reference signal is stopped, or the positioning reference signal is not sent, or the positioning reference signal is stopped;
  • the terminal assumes that the positioning reference signal corresponding to the configuration information of the positioning reference signal does not exist, or that the configuration information corresponding to the positioning reference signal does not exist.
  • the positioning reference signal is not sent, or the positioning reference signal corresponding to the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is stopped, or the positioning reference signal corresponding to the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is not sent, or the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is stopped.
  • the positioning reference signal corresponding to the information is not sent, or the positioning reference signal corresponding to the information.
  • the update information of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the following:
  • the configuration information used to indicate whether the positioning reference signal has updated indication information or the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal includes at least one of the following:
  • the spatial relationship configuration of the positioning reference signal is changed
  • the path loss configuration of the positioning reference signal changes.
  • the positioning reference signal indicated by the first indication information is one of the following granularities:
  • receiving the first indication information in an idle state or an inactive state includes at least one of the following:
  • the first indication information is obtained from the downlink scheduling resource PDSCH configured by the network side device.
  • the first indication information is represented by the bits of the short message in the paging PDCCH, or represented by the reserved bits in the paging PDCCH.
  • whether the configuration information of the positioning reference signal has updated indication information is obtained in the paging PDCCH, and the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal is obtained in the paging PDSCH scheduled by the paging PDCCH.
  • the first indication information further includes indication information of whether to enter a connected state and update the configuration information of the positioning reference signal.
  • the radio frequency module 111 is configured to, if the first indication information includes the indication information to enter the connected state and update the configuration information of the positioning reference signal, or the first indication information does not include not to enter the connection state to update the indication information of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal, initiate random access to enter the connected state and update the configuration information of the positioning reference signal.
  • the radio frequency module 111 is configured to send first feedback information, where the first feedback information is used to indicate that the first indication information has been received.
  • the first feedback information is sent in an idle state or an inactive state or after the terminal enters a connected state.
  • the first feedback information includes at least one of the following:
  • the feedback reasons include at least one of the following: feedback of the availability indication of the positioning reference signal, feedback of updating the configuration information of the positioning reference signal, and feedback of updating the configuration information of the positioning reference signal initiated by the network side device ;
  • the update response of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal where the update response is used to respond to whether the configuration information of the positioning reference signal in the first indication information has updated indication information.
  • the radio frequency module 111 is configured to receive the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal.
  • receiving the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal includes one of the following ways:
  • the updated configuration information of the positioning reference signal is received.
  • the processing module 1110 is configured to perform one of the following if the terminal is configured with an initial downlink BWP:
  • the terminal does not receive the downlink positioning reference signal, and the first signal includes at least one of the following: SIB1, except for the SIB1 Other SIBs other than Msg2, MSg4, MsgB, PDCCH, SSB scheduling SIB1;
  • the terminal performs BWP handover according to an instruction of a network side device, a protocol agreement or a selection of the terminal, and receives the downlink positioning reference signal on the BWP after the handover.
  • the location-related information includes: second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the information of subsequent data transmission, and the information of the subsequent data transmission includes at least one of the following:
  • the type of data to be transmitted subsequently includes at least one of the following: positioning-related data or non-positioning-related data, control plane data or user plane data, signaling radio bearer, non-access stratum or data radio bearer data.
  • the radio frequency module 111 is configured to transmit subsequent data to be transmitted on the PUSCH scheduled by the PDCCH configured by the network side device.
  • the PDCCH configured by the network side device carries a type indication of the scheduled uplink data; transmitting subsequent data to be transmitted on the PUSCH scheduled by the PDCCH configured by the network side device includes:
  • the subsequent data to be transmitted corresponding to the type indicated by the type indication is transmitted on the PUSCH scheduled by the PDCCH configured by the network side device.
  • the radio frequency module 111 is configured to send third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the configuration information of the positioning reference signal needs to be updated, and the positioning reference signal includes an uplink positioning reference signal and a downlink positioning reference signal. at least one of the signals.
  • the third indication information is sent in an SDT manner or sent after the terminal enters a connected state.
  • the third indication information further includes: a reason for sending the third indication information, and the reason includes at least one of the following: the updating of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal initiated by the terminal, the Update of the configuration information of the positioning reference signal, the configuration information of the positioning reference signal is not available.
  • the positioning reference signal indicated by the third indication information is one of the following granularities:
  • One or more sets of positioning reference signals under the configuration information of the positioning reference signals are One or more sets of positioning reference signals under the configuration information of the positioning reference signals
  • the third indication information further includes at least one of the following:
  • the measurement result includes at least one of the following: a reference signal identifier, the measurement result of the N best beams above the threshold, the indication of the N best beams above the threshold, and the measurement of the best beam
  • the best beam indication is the first to reach the measurement results of the N beams with the strongest RSRP, the first to reach the N beams with the strongest RSRP indication, and N is specified by the protocol, indicated by the network side device or selected by the terminal.
  • the radio frequency module 111 is used for the terminal to send third indication information when at least one of the following conditions is met:
  • the terminal If the terminal detects that the adjustment of the tracking area exceeds the first tracking area threshold, and the terminal does not enter the connected state, sending the third indication information;
  • the terminal If the terminal detects that the difference between the two first measurement values before and after exceeds the first measurement threshold, and the terminal does not enter the connected state, it sends the third indication information, where the first measurement value includes at least one of the following: Measurement information of SSB, measurement information of paging or Msg2 or Msg4 or MsgB, measurement information of the positioning reference signal;
  • the third indication information is sent;
  • the third indication information is sent.
  • the preconfigured area where the configuration information of the positioning reference signal takes effect is a certain cell, a certain cell list, or an area covered by a certain or certain SSBs.
  • the radio frequency module 111 is configured to receive first indication information in an idle state or an inactive state, where the first indication information includes at least one of the following:

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Radar, Positioning & Navigation (AREA)
  • Remote Sensing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请公开了一种定位方法、终端及网络侧设备，属于无线通信技术领域，本申请实施例的定位方法包括：终端在空闲态或非激活态执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括以下至少之一：接收并测量下行定位参考信号；上报位置相关信息；发送上行定位参考信号。

Description

定位方法、终端及网络侧设备
相关申请的交叉引用
本申请主张在2021年03月26日在中国提交的中国专利申请No.202110327009.3的优先权，其全部内容通过引用包含于此。
技术领域
本申请属于无线通信技术领域，具体涉及一种定位方法、终端及网络侧设备。
背景技术
目前定位方法中，用户设备(User Equipment，UE)(该UE又称为终端)需要在无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control，RRC)连接态(connected态)执行定位操作，若终端处于RRC空闲态(ilde态)或RRC非激活态(inactive态)，需要先进入RRC连接态，才能够执行定位操作。
终端的节能方案是备受瞩目的方向之一，如果终端必须在RRC连接态执行定位操作，将不利于节能。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种定位方法、终端及网络侧设备，能够解决终端必须在RRC连接态才能够执行定位操作，不利于节能的问题。
第一方面，提供了一种定位方法，包括：
终端在空闲态或非激活态执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括以下至少之一：
接收并测量下行定位参考信号；
上报位置相关信息；
发送上行定位参考信号。
第二方面，提供了一种定位方法，包括：
终端在空闲态、非激活态或连接态执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括：上报位置相关信息，所述位置相关信息包括定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。
第三方面，提供了一种定位方法，包括：
网络侧设备执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括以下至少之一：
向空闲态或非激活态的终端发送下行定位参考信号；
接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的位置相关信息；
测量空闲态或非激活态的终端发送的上行定位参考信号。
第四方面，提供了一种定位方法，包括：
网络侧设备执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括：
接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的位置相关信息，所述位置相关信息包括定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。
第五方面，提供了一种定位装置，包括：
定位模块，用于在空闲态或非激活态执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括以下至少之一：
接收并测量下行定位参考信号；
上报位置相关信息；
发送上行定位参考信号。
第六方面，提供了一种定位装置，包括：
定位模块，用于在空闲态、非激活态或连接态执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括：
上报位置相关信息，所述位置相关信息包括定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。
第七方面，提供了一种定位装置，包括：
定位模块，用于执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括以下至少之一：
向空闲态或非激活态的终端发送下行定位参考信号；
接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的位置相关信息；
测量空闲态或非激活态的终端发送的上行定位参考信号。
第八方面，提供了一种定位装置，包括：
定位模块，用于执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括：
接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的位置相关信息，所述位置相关信息包括定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。
第九方面，提供了一种终端，该终端包括处理器、存储器及存储在所述存储器上并可在所述处理器上运行的程序或指令，所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时实现如第一方面或第二方面所述的方法的步骤。
第十方面，提供了一种终端，包括处理器及通信接口，其中，所述处理器用于在空闲态或非激活态执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括以下至少之一：
接收并测量下行定位参考信号；
上报位置相关信息；
发送上行定位参考信号。
第十一方面，提供了一种终端，包括处理器及通信接口，其中，所述处理器用于在空闲态、非激活态或连接态执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括：
上报位置相关信息，所述位置相关信息包括定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。
第十二方面，提供了一种网络侧设备，该网络侧设备包括处理器、存储器及存储在所述存储器上并可在所述处理器上运行的程序或指令，所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时实现如第二方面所述的方法的步骤。
第十三方面，提供了一种网络侧设备，包括处理器及通信接口，其中，所述处理器用于执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括以下至少之一：
向空闲态或非激活态的终端发送下行定位参考信号；
接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的位置相关信息；
测量空闲态或非激活态的终端发送的上行定位参考信号。
第十三方面，提供了一种网络侧设备，包括处理器及通信接口，其中，所述处理器用于执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括：
接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的位置相关信息，所述位置相关信息包括定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。
第十四方面，提供了一种可读存储介质，所述可读存储介质上存储程序或指令，所述程序或指令被处理器执行时实现如第一方面或第二方面或第三方面或第四方面所述的方法的步骤。
第十五方面，提供了一种芯片，所述芯片包括处理器和通信接口，所述通信接口和所述处理器耦合，所述处理器用于运行程序或指令，实现如第一方面或第二方面或第三方面或第四方面所述的方法。
第十六方面，提供了一种计算机程序/程序产品，所述计算机程序/程序产品被存储在非瞬态的存储介质中，所述程序/程序产品被至少一个处理器执行以实现如第一方面或第二方面或第三方面或第四方面所述的定位方法的步骤。
在本申请实施例中，在RRC非激活态或RRC空闲态下执行定位功能，保障定位性能和低功耗。
附图说明
图1为本申请实施例可应用的一种无线通信系统的框图；
图2为空闲态、非激活态和连接态三种状态之间的关系示意图；
图3为定时提前的提前量的确定方法示意图；
图4为2步RACH的流程示意图；
图5为上行定位过程的流程示意图；
图6为本申请实施例的由终端执行的定位方法的流程示意图；
图7为本申请实施例的由网络侧设备执行的定位方法的流程示意图；
图8为本申请一实施例的定位装置的结构示意图；
图9为本申请另一实施例的定位装置的结构示意图；
图10为本申请实施例的通信设备的结构示意图；
图11为本申请实施例的终端的硬件结构示意图；
图12为本申请实施例的网络侧设备的硬件结构示意图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚描述，显然，所描述的实施例是本申请一部分实施例，而不是全部的实施例。基于本申请中的实施例，本领域普通技术人员所获得的所有其他实施例，都属于本申请保护的范围。
本申请的说明书和权利要求书中的术语“第一”、“第二”等是用于区别类似的对象，而不用于描述特定的顺序或先后次序。应该理解这样使用的术语在适当情况下可以互换，以便本申请的实施例能够以除了在这里图示或描述的那些以外的顺序实施，且“第一”、“第二”所区别的对象通常为一类，并不限定对象的个数，例如第一对象可以是一个，也可以是多个。此外，说明书以及权利要求中“和/或”表示所连接对象的至少其中之一，字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
值得指出的是，本申请实施例所描述的技术不限于长期演进型(Long Term Evolution，LTE)/LTE的演进(LTE-Advanced，LTE-A)系统，还可用于其他无线通信系统，诸如码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access，CDMA)、时分多址(Time Division Multiple Access，TDMA)、频分多址(Frequency Division Multiple Access，FDMA)、正交频分多址(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access，OFDMA)、单载波频分多址(Single-carrier Frequency-Division Multiple Access，SC-FDMA)和其他系统。本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”常被可互换地使用，所描述的技术既可用于以上提及的系统和无线电技术，也可用于其他系统和无线电技术。以下描述出 于示例目的描述了新空口(New Radio，NR)系统，并且在以下大部分描述中使用NR术语，但是这些技术也可应用于NR系统应用以外的应用，如第6代(6 th Generation，6G)通信系统。
图1示出本申请实施例可应用的一种无线通信系统的框图。无线通信系统包括终端11和网络侧设备12。其中，终端11也可以称作终端设备或者用户设备(User Equipment，UE)，终端11可以是手机、平板电脑(Tablet Personal Computer)、膝上型电脑(Laptop Computer)或称为笔记本电脑、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant，PDA)、掌上电脑、上网本、超级移动个人计算机(Ultra-Mobile Personal Computer，UMPC)、移动上网装置(Mobile Internet Device，MID)、可穿戴式设备(Wearable Device)或车载设备(VUE)、行人终端(PUE)等终端侧设备，可穿戴式设备包括：智能手表、手环、耳机、眼镜等。需要说明的是，在本申请实施例并不限定终端11的具体类型。网络侧设备12可以是基站或核心网，其中，基站可被称为节点B、演进节点B、接入点、基收发机站(Base Transceiver Station，BTS)、无线电基站、无线电收发机、基本服务集(Basic Service Set，BSS)、扩展服务集(Extended Service Set，ESS)、B节点、演进型B节点(eNB)、家用B节点、家用演进型B节点、无线局域网(Wireless Local Area Network，WLAN)接入点、WiFi节点、发送接收点(Transmitting Receiving Point，TRP)或所述领域中其他某个合适的术语，只要达到相同的技术效果，所述基站不限于特定技术词汇，需要说明的是，在本申请实施例中仅以NR系统中的基站为例，但是并不限定基站的具体类型。可选的，核心网设备可以是位置服务器，比如NR中的位置服务器(如位置管理功能(Location Management Function，LMF))，当然本发明中位置服务器不限于NR版本。
下面首先对本申请的技术方案相关的技术内容进行说明。
1、RRC空闲态(Idle态)、RRC非激活态(Inactive态)和RRC连接态(connected态)
为了方便说明，RRC空闲态在下文中简称为空闲态，RRC非激活态在下 文中简称为非激活态，RRC连接态在下文中简称为连接态。
处于空闲态的UE，在网络侧设备没有RRC上下文，也就是说网络侧设备与UE之间通信所必须的参数不属于某个特定的小区，网络侧设备也不知道是否存在该UE。UE被分配了一组跟踪区标识(Tracking area identifier，TAI)。从核心网的角度来看，无线接入网(Access Network，RAN)侧与核心网的连接已断开。为了减少耗电，UE在大部分时间处于休眠状态，因此无法进行数据传输。在下行链路中，处于空闲态的UE可周期性地唤醒以从网络接收寻呼消息(如果有的话)。移动性(Mobility)可由UE进行小区重选来处理。在空闲态，UE与网络侧设备不会保持上行同步，如果要从空闲态转入连接态，只能通过随机接入(Random Access)，在UE与网络侧设备建立RRC上下文。
在连接态，可建立RRC上下文，且通信所需的所有参数对于两个实体(UE与网络侧设备)都是已知的。从核心网的角度来看，UE处于核心网连接(CN_Connected)状态。UE所属的小区是已知的，并且已经配置了用于UE和网络侧设备之间的传输信令目的设备标识，即小区无线网络临时标识符(Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier，C-RNTI)。在连接态，移动性(Mobility)可由网络侧设备控制，即UE向网络侧设备提供邻小区测量，网络侧设备命令UE进行切换(handover)。上行时间同步可能存在也可能不存在，当有数据要传输时，可通过使用随机接入去建立上行同步。
在长期演进(Long Term Evolution，LTE)中，仅支持空闲态和连接态。实际中的常见情况是使用空闲态作为UE的主要睡眠状态来省电。然而，由于在一些情况下常常存在小数据包的频繁传输，如果按照LTE方式，会存在大量的空闲态到连接态的转换。这些转换增加了信令负载和信令延时。因此，为了减少信令负载和等待时间，在新无线(New Radio，NR)中引入了非激活态。
在非激活态，保持了网络侧设备与UE侧的RRC上下文。从核心网的角度来看，RAN侧与核心网的连接处于状态。因此从非激活态转换到连接态的速度很快，且不需要核心网信令。同时，允许UE以空闲态类似的方式休眠， 并且通过小区重选来处理移动性。因此，非激活态可以被视为空闲态和连接态的混合。
请参考图2，图2为空闲态、非激活态和连接态三种状态之间的关系示意图，可以看出，不同状态之间的一个重要区别是所涉及的移动性机制(mobility)。高效的移动性处理是任何移动通信系统的关键部分。对于空闲态和非激活态，移动性由UE通过小区重选来处理，而对于连接态，移动性由网络侧设备基于UE测量来处理。
对于空闲态和非激活态的UE，两者之间共同点在于都有公共陆地移动网(Public Land Mobile Network，PLMN)选择、小区选择和重选、系统消息接收功能；差异点包含以下几个部分：(1)由于空闲态下核心网只知道UE所在的跟踪区(Tracking Area，TA),但是不知道具体的主小区标识(pcell id)，所以会在跟踪区或跟踪区列表(list)下发寻呼，然而对于非激活态，NG-RAN知道UE属于哪个RNA，所以只会在RNA区域寻呼UE；(2)UE接入层(AS)上下文在非激活态下保存在UE和NG-RNA中；(3)UE在非激活态下保存控制面下的非接入层(Non-Access Stratum，NAS)信令连接和用户面5GC-NG-RAN连接。
对于非激活态和连接态的UE，它们之间的共同点在于：(1)UE接入层上下文在非激活态下保存在UE和NG-RNA中；(2)控制面和用户面的连接已经建立，所以通常核心网认为UE处于连接态；两者差异性在于：(1)连接态下NG-RAN知道UE所在的服务小区，但是对于非激活态NG-RAN知道UE属于哪个RNA，所以只会在RNA区域寻呼UE；(2)非激活态下UE具有PLMN搜网，小区重选和系统消息接收功能；(3)连接态下UE具有上下行通道传输和移动性功能(切换)。
UE从非激活态进入到连接态的场景包括：上行有数据待发；非接入层有信令流程发起；RAN寻呼响应；通知网络已经离开RAN通知区域(notification area)；周期性RAN通知区域更新定时器(notification area update timer)超时。
2、连接态的上行定位参考信号(SRS)
信道探测用参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal，SRS)的时域类型包括周期、非周期和半静态。
对于每种SRS资源(resource)配置，包括comb2，comb4，comb8的SRS配置，其中comb数是指频域上相邻的两个SRS资源之间的子载波间隔数，其中，对应的最大循环移位(cyclic shift)分别是8,12,6。SRS资源配置还包括SRS资源的符号数和起始的符号。对于非周期SRS，SRS资源配置包括时隙偏移(slot offset)，对于半静态和周期SRS，SRS资源配置包括周期和时隙偏移，周期单位为时隙。另外，SRS资源配置还包括SRS的空间关系SRS-SpatialRelationInfoPos，空间关系的参考信号可以是服务小区的同步信号块(Synchronization Signal and PBCH block，SSB)，信道状态信息参考信号(channel State Information Reference Signal，CSI-RS)和SRS，邻区的SSB和下行定位参考信号(Positioning Reference Signal，PRS)。
SRS资源配置可以参考如下：
Figure PCTCN2022083018-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2022083018-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2022083018-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2022083018-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2022083018-appb-000005
3、定时提前(Timing Advance，TA)
定时提前用于UE上行传输，是指UE发送上行数据的系统帧相比对应的下行帧要提前一定的时间，具体的提前量由基站根据UE发送的随机接入前导码(preamble)计算，然后再通过定时提前命令(Timing Advance Command，TAC)通知给UE。
如图3所示，N TA是UE在定时提前命令中解析出来的量，N TA,offset通过参数n-TimingAdvanceOffset通知UE，如果UE未收到该参数，则使用一个预设值，该预设值是与复用模式和频率范围有关的固定值，具体数值如表1所示：
表1 N TA offset的值
Figure PCTCN2022083018-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2022083018-appb-000007
在随机接入中，基站通过测量接收到的前导码来确定定时提前值，并通过随机接入反馈(Rach access response，RAR)中的Timing Advance Command(TAC)发送给UE。Timing Advance Command共12个bits，指示范围为:T A＝0,1,2,…,3846。子载波间隔为2^u*15kHz时，N TA通过下式确定：N TA＝T A·16·64/2 μ。
也就是说在NR中，N TA还与子载波间隔有关，该子载波间隔取决于收到RAR后的第一个上行传输，即Msg3的子载波间隔。
虽然在随机接入中UE完成了定时提前，但是UE的位置等可能会随着时间变化，所以基站需要不断维护定时提前。对于其他情况，TAC的指示范围是：T A＝0,1,2,…,63。N TA通过下式确定：N TA_new＝N TA_old+(T A-31)·16· 64/2 μ。其中，N TA_old是收到TAC之前使用的N TA，N TA_new是收到TAC后更新后的N TA。
4、4步随机接入信道(Random Access Channel，RACH)和2步RACH
1)4步随机接入过程包括：基于竞争的随机接入过程(四步随机接入(4-step RACH))和基于非竞争的随机接入过程.
对于“基于竞争的随机接入过程”，UE发送Msg1(随机接入请求)给网络侧设备。网络侧设备接收到Msg1后给UE发送Msg2(随机接入响应RAR)消息给UE，该消息中携带了上行授权(uplink grant)信息。UE根据Msg2中的uplink grant，发送Msg3。网络侧设备接收到Msg3后发送Msg4(如，竞争解决标识)给UE。UE接收到Msg4判断是否竞争解决成功，如果成功则随机接入过程成功过，否则重新发起随机接入过程。
对于“基于非竞争的随机接入过程”，网络侧设备为UE分配专用的RACH资源进行接入，UE在专用资源上发送Msg1(随机接入请求)给网络侧设备，网络侧设备接收到Msg1后给UE发送Msg2(随机接入响应RAR)消息给UE。但当专用的RACH资源不足时，网络侧设备会指示UE发起基于竞争的RA。
2)2步RACH
请参考图4，2步RACH包括以下步骤：
步骤0：网络侧设备给UE配置2步RACH的配置信息，如包括：MsgA和MsgB对应的发送资源信息。
步骤1：UE触发2步RACH过程。将请求信息(MsgA)发送给网络侧设备，如通过物理上行共享信道(Physical Uplink Shared Channel，PUSCH)发送。同时UE也可能会发送物理随机接入信道(Physical Random Access Channel，PRACH)信息给网络侧设备。
步骤2：网络侧设备发送确认信息(MsgB)给UE。如果UE接收MsgB失败，则UE重新发送MsgA。
5、上行定位过程
如图5所示，上行定位过程包括以下步骤：
步骤0：LMF和gNB/TRP交换配置信息；
步骤1：LMF和UE交互能力信息；
步骤2：LMF向gNB/TRP发送NR定位协议A(NRPPa)定位信息请求(Positioning information request)；
步骤3-3a：gNB/TRP决定上行SRS资源并向UE发送SRS配置；
步骤4：gNB/TRP向LMF发送NRPPa定位响应；
步骤5a：LMF向gNB/TRP发送NRPPa定位激活请求；
步骤5b：gNB/TRP激活UE SRS传输；
步骤5c：gNB/TRP向LMF发送NRPPa定位激活响应；
步骤6：LMF向gNB/TRP发送NRPPa测量请求；
步骤7：gNB/TRP进行UL SRS测量；
步骤8：gNB/TRP向LMF发送NRPPa测量响应。
6、小数据传输(Small Data Transmission，SDT)
根据网络侧设备配置的资源，UE在空闲态或非激活态时，可以通过以下方法将数据直接发送给网络侧设备：
1)初始接入的4步随机接入过程的Msg3。
2)初始接入的2步随机接入过程的MsgA。
3)网络配置的专属上行PUSCH资源(即，预配置(pre-configured)PUSCH；或，预分配上行资源(Preallocated Uplink Resource，PUR))。
网络侧设备可以通过以下方式将数据直接发送给UE：
1)初始接入的4步随机接入过程的Msg4。
2)初始接入的2步随机接入过程的MsgB。
3)网络配置的专属上行资源对应的下行反馈资源。
7、按需(On-demand)PRS
R-16协议中并没有引入按需PRS，PRS发送以广播的形式发送，PRS配置相对固定，不支持灵活地更改PRS配置，这可能会造成一些资源的浪费。 例如，网络设备在某个区域内配置了128个TRP发送带宽较大的PRS，而在这个区域内，只有一部分UE的定位精度要求较高，或者只有一部分UE有定位需求，那么为了这一部分UE而使得整个区域内覆盖大带宽的PRS是不值得的。又比如，为了减少开销，某区域内配置了带宽较小的PRS，而其中一些UE有较强的定位精度、时延需求或功耗需求，现有协议无法支持灵活地配置满足这些UE需求的PRS。
从第三代合作计划(3rd Generation Partnership Project,3GPP)Rel-16起，引入按需PRS，专门针对某个或某些UE的定位需求，灵活增加或减少PRS配置。比如一种简单的示例，将按需PRS配置设置为多个PRS配置参数集(包含周期，带宽，频点等等)，在不需要时关闭某些PRS参数集的传输，在需要时打开某些PRS的传输。
R-17阶段，已经确定将按需PRS作为标准化的一部分。
下面结合附图，通过一些实施例及其应用场景对本申请实施例提供的定位方法、终端及网络侧设备进行详细地说明。
请参考图6，本申请实施例提供一种定位方法，包括：
步骤61：终端在空闲态或非激活态执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括以下至少之一：
接收并测量下行定位参考信号；
上报位置相关信息；
发送上行定位参考信号。
可选的，位置相关信息包含但不限于以下至少之一：位置信息，定位测量结果，事件信息，RRM测量结果，下行定位测量结果和/或上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系等。事件信息包含但不限于以下至少之一：区域事件和动作事件等。区域事件是指UE检测到自己进入、离开或位于指定目标区域范围(如区域小区list/RNA/TAC)。动作事件是指UE检测到自己由之前的位置移动超过某个预定义的线性距离。
本申请实施例中，利用非激活态或空闲态低能耗的特点，开发定位功能， 保障定位性能和低功耗。
本申请实施例中，利用非激活态或空闲态低能耗的特点，开发定位功能，保障定位性能和低功耗。
PRS可以认为是一个小区级或者区域级的公共信号，不管连接态UE还是非连接态(空闲态或非激活态)的UE，都可以在同一个区域内共享相同的PRS。Rel-17阶段，已经确定会引入按需PRS，LMF可以根据UE或者自身的需求，开启、关闭或更新PRS的配置信息。而按需PRS的开启/关闭/更新也会对空闲态或非激活态的UE接收PRS产生影响。一般来说，UE可以通过广播或者单播(如通过RRC释放信令)的方式获取空闲态或非激活态的PRS配置信息。若网络根据需要改变PRS的配置信息时，比如关闭PRS的配置信息，如果不及时通知空闲态或非激活态的UE，UE还会在原PRS配置的时间‘醒来’，对PRS进行搜索和监听，这就会导致白白的功率消耗。因此，如何向空闲态或非激活态UE通知PRS的配置信息的开启、关闭或更新，或者PRS的可用性(availability)是需要解决的问题。
为解决上述问题，本申请给出了一种不通过系统信息变更，通知终端定位参考信号配置变更的方法，该方法包括：网络侧设备发起的定位参考信号的配置更新，和/或，UE发起的定位参考信号的配置更新的方法，下面将分别进行说明。
1、网络侧设备发起的定位参考信号的配置更新
本申请实施例中，可选的，所述定位方法还包括：所述终端在空闲态或非激活态接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息包括以下至少之一：
1)定位参考信号的可用性信息或者所述定位参考信号的配置信息的可用性信息；
可用性(availablility)，也可以表示为定位参考信号(或定位参考信号的配置信息)的开启或关闭信息。
2)定位参考信号的配置信息(配置信息又可以称为辅助信息)的更新信息；
配置信息包括以下至少之一：空间关系配置和路损配置等。
其中，所述定位参考信号包括以下至少之一：所述上行定位参考信号和所述下行定位参考信号。可选的，所述定位参考信号包括以下至少之一：PRS，上行定位参考信号(SRS for positioning)，CSI-RS，TRS，SSB，preamble等。
本申请实施例中，网络侧设备可根据以下条件中的至少之一判断是否发起的定位参考信号配置更新：
按需PRS使得配置更新；
UE维护(maintence)空闲态或非激活态的RRM测量及上报，网络侧设备获得最新的波束测量结果，对空间关系和/或路损等配置进行更新。
本申请实施例中，可选的，所述终端在空闲态或非激活态接收第一指示信息之后还包括：
若所述第一指示信息指示所述定位参考信号不可用，所述终端假设所述定位参考信号不存在，或所述定位参考信号未被发送，或所述定位参考信号被停止发送，或不发送所述定位参考信号，或停止发送所述定位参考信号；
或者
若所述第一指示信息指示所述定位参考信号的配置信息不可用，所述终端假设所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号不存在，或所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号未被发送，或定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号被停止发送，或不发送所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号，或停止发送所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号。
本申请实施例中，可选的，若所述终端假设所述定位参考信号不存在，或所述定位参考信号未被发送，或所述定位参考信号被停止发送，所述终端不对所述定位参考信号执行测量。
本申请实施例中，可选的，所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新信息包括以下至少之一：
所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息；
更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
本申请实施例中，可选的，用于指示所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息或更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息包括以下至少之一：
所述定位参考信号的配置信息的开启或关闭；
所述定位参考信号的带宽的增加或减少；
所述定位参考信号的周期的增加或减少；
所述定位参考信号的静默(muting)配置的变化；
所述定位参考信号的空间关系配置变化；
所述定位参考信号的路损配置变化。
其中，所述定位参考信号的配置信息的开启或关闭，是指设置一个开关控制所述定位参考信号配置信息的‘开启或关闭(on/off)’。比如开关设置为‘开’，该定位参考信号的配置信息开启；设置为‘关’，该定位参考信号的配置信息关闭。当然，‘开启或关闭(on/off)’还可以用‘使能(enable)’或‘not enable’表示。
本申请实施例中，可选的，所述第一指示信息指示的定位参考信号为以下粒度之一：
一组或多组所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号；
一个或多个定位参考信号资源；
一个或多个定位参考信号资源集合；
一个或多个TRP下的定位参考信号；如PRS。
一个或多个频率层(frequency layer)下的定位参考信号；如PRS。
全部频率层下的定位参考信号；如PRS。
本申请实施例中，可选的，所述终端在空闲态或非激活态接收第一指示信息包括以下至少之一：
1)所述终端在寻呼物理下行控制信道(Physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)中获得所述第一指示信息；
本申请实施例中，可选的，所述第一指示信息由寻呼PDCCH中的短消 息(short message)的比特位表示，或者，由寻呼PDCCH中的保留(reserved)比特位表示。
2)所述终端在寻呼PDCCH调度的寻呼物理下行共享信道(Physical downlink shared channel，PDSCH)中获得所述第一指示信息；
一种实施方式中，可选的，所述终端在寻呼PDCCH中获得所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息，在寻呼PDCCH调度的寻呼PDSCH中获得更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
可选的，所述寻呼PDCCH为调度了寻呼消息的PDCCH。即，当且仅当寻呼PDCCH调度了寻呼消息的条件下，才能用寻呼PDSCH携带第一指示信息。
3)所述终端在寻呼提前指示(Paging early indication，PEI))中获得所述第一指示信息；
寻呼提前指示可以解释为寻呼唤醒信号。
4)所述终端在随机接入过程或小数据传输过程中获得所述第一指示信息；例如面向终端终止(Mobile Terminated，MT)数据传输的随机接入过程或小数据传输过程中获得所述第一指示信息；
如通过随机接入(RACH)过程的消息携带，随机接入过程的消息包含以下之一：Msg2,Msg4,MsgB。
5)所述终端在广播消息中获得所述第一指示信息；
广播消息例如为系统信息块(System Information Block，SIB)消息。
6)所述终端在RRC释放消息中获得所述第一指示信息；
本申请实施例中，可选的，所述在RRC释放消息中获得所述第一指示信息包括：
所述终端上报位置相关信息之后，在RRC释放消息中获得所述第一指示信息，以指示后续的定位参考信号的配置情况。
7)所述终端根据网络侧设备配置的下行监听机会和/或监听窗口，在PDCCH和/或PDSCH中获得所述第一指示信息；
一种实施方式中，可选的，根据网络侧设备配置的下行监听机会和/或监听窗口，在PDCCH和/或PDSCH中获得所述第一指示信息包括：
所述终端在C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH和/或在C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH调度的PDSCH中获得所述第一指示信息。
本申请实施例中，可选的，在C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH和/或在C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH调度的PDSCH中获得所述第一指示信息包括：
所述终端上报位置相关信息之后，在C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH中获得所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息，在C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH调度的PDSCH中获得更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息；
或者
所述终端上报位置相关信息之后，在C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH调度的PDSCH中获得所述第一指示信息；
其中，所述C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH和/或在C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH调度的PDSCH在上报或者竞争解决成功消息之后，在RRC释放消息之前。
8)所述终端从网络侧设备配置的下行调度资源(如半静态调度资源(Semi-Persistent Scheduling，SPS)资源)PDSCH中获得所述第一指示信息。
本申请实施例中，可选的，所述第一指示信息还包括是否进入连接态并更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
本申请实施例中，可选的，所述终端在空闲态或非激活态接收第一指示信息还包括：
若所述第一指示信息包括进入连接态并更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息的指示信息，或者，所述第一指示信息不包括不进入连接态以更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息的指示信息，所述终端发起随机接入进入连接态并更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
可选的，所述第一指示信息不包括不进入连接态以更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息的指示信息可以为缺省配置或默认配置。
本申请的一些实施例中，可选的，所述终端在空闲态或非激活态接收第 一指示信息之后还包括：
若所述第一指示信息包括不进入连接态以更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息的指示信息，所述终端发送第一反馈信息，所述第一反馈信息用于指示已收到所述第一指示信息。
本申请的另外一些实施例中，可选的，所述终端在空闲态或非激活态接收第一指示信息之后还包括：
所述终端发送第一反馈信息，所述第一反馈信息用于指示已收到所述第一指示信息。
也就是说，终端可以在所述第一指示信息包括不进入连接态以更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息的指示信息时，发送第一反馈信息，也可以不根据所述第一指示信息，直接发送第一反馈信息。
可选的，第一指示信息或第一反馈信息是LTE定位协议(LTE position protocol，LPP)消息(LPP消息可以是位置服务器与UE之间的直接信令)，可以由承载在NAS消息中，并进一步承载的RRC消息中(由SRB0或SRB2承载)。
本申请实施例中，可选的，所述第一反馈信息在空闲态或非激活态发送或者所述终端进入连接态(如发起RRC连接建立或恢复过程进入连接态)之后发送。
本申请实施例中，所述第一反馈信息在空闲态或非激活态发送包括：通过SDT(如随机接入小数据传输(RA-SDT))的方式发送，或者通过网络(预)配置上行资源(如PUSCH或PUCCH)发送。SDT方式还可以称为上行SDT，SDT的方式可以包含以下至少之一：控制面的SDT，用户面的SDT，RACH-based SDT，Configure grant-based SDT。
一种实施方式中，通过SDT的方式在RRC恢复请求(resumerequest)消息中携带第一反馈信息。
可选的，本申请实施例中的所有通过SDT的方式反馈的方法均可以与UE上报位置相关信息的方式一致。
可选的，
可选的，所述第一指示信息还包括以下信息至少之一：
是否请求终端发送第一反馈信息；
指示所述终端在连接态发送第一反馈信息或不进入连接态发送第一反馈信息；
第一反馈信息的资源配置信息，如时频位置等。
本申请实施例中，可选的，所述第一反馈信息包括以下至少之一：
反馈理由(如发起SDT的理由)，所述反馈理由包括以下至少之一：所述定位参考信号的可用性指示反馈，所述定位参考信号的配置信息更新反馈，网络侧设备发起的所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新反馈；一种实施方式中，可选的，所述反馈理由通过RRC恢复请求消息中的恢复原因携带。
所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新响应，所述更新响应用于响应所述第一指示信息中的所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息。
本申请实施例中，可选的，所述第一反馈信息中仅携带所述反馈理由和/或所述定位参考信号的配置信息更新响应。即所述第一反馈信息中不携带除了述反馈理由和/或所述定位参考信号的配置信息更新响应之外的其他上行数据。
本申请实施例中，可选的，所述终端发送第一反馈信息之后还包括：所述终端接收更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
本申请实施例中，可选的，所述终端接收更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息包括以下方式之一：
所述终端在RRC释放消息中获得更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息；
所述终端在C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH调度的PDSCH中获得更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息；可选的，所述C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH及其调度PDSCH在第一反馈信息或者成功竞争解决消息之后，在RRC释放消息之前。
所述终端进入连接态之后接收更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
本申请实施例中，可选的，所述终端接收更新的所述定位参考信号的配 置信息包括：在所述第一定时器超时之前接收更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
在连接态，在没有配置测量间隔(measurement gap)时，UE只能在激活(active)下行链路DL(DownLink)带宽部分(Bandwidth Part，BWP)范围内，测量与激活DL BWP的参数配置(numerology)相同的PRS。而在空闲态或非激活态，若UE被配置了初始(initial)DL BWP时，且UE要接收定位参考信号时，UE行为如何是需要解决的问题。
本申请实施例中，可选的，接收并测量下行定位参考信号包括：
若所述终端被配置了初始下行BWP，所述终端执行以下之一：
1)在所述初始下行BWP内接收所述下行定位参考信号；
即终端不期望在初始下行BWP外接收所述下行定位参考信号。
2)在所述初始下行BWP内接收与所述初始下行BWP参数配置(numerology)相同的下行定位参考信号；其中，参数配置包括以下至少之一：子载波间隔(SCS)，循环前缀(CP)类型。
即所述终端不期望在初始下行BWP内接收numerology不同的下行定位参考信号。
3)若所述下行定位参考信号与第一信号在同一个符号重复或碰撞或传输，所述终端不接收所述下行定位参考信号，所述第一信号包括以下至少之一：SIB1，除所述SIB1之外的其他SIB(Other SIB)，Msg2，MSg4，MsgB，调度SIB1的PDCCH，SSB；
即所述终端不期望在同一个符号接收所述下行定位参考信号与第一信号。或者当下行定位参考信号与第一信号在同一个符号重复(或碰撞或传输时)，终端不被要求(不期望)处理下行定位参考信号。
4)所述终端在所述初始下行BWP外(或者不在初始下行BWP内)接收所述下行定位参考信号；
可选的，若下行定位参考信号位于初始下行BWP外，和/或，下行定位参考信号的参数配置与初始下行BWP不同，所述终端在所述初始下行BWP 外接收所述下行定位参考信号。
可选的，所述终端在所述初始下行BWP外接收所述下行定位参考信号包括：若接收到网络侧设备发送的使能(enable)指示，所述终端在所述初始下行BWP外接收所述下行定位参考信号(或者不在初始下行BWP内接收下行定位参考信号)。比如：当接收到使能指示，终端可以不在初始下行BWP接收下行定位参考信号(或者，在初始下行BWP外接收下行定位参考信号)；否则，终端只能在初始下行BWP内接收下行定位参考信号(或者终端不能在初始下行BWP外接收下行定位参考信号)。
可选的，终端在接收下行定位参考信号的时间段内，不期望接收和发送其他信号或数据，除了以下信号中的至少之一：PRS，用于RRM测量的参考信号，用于随机接入过程的信号。
可选的，接收下行定位参考信号的时间段可以是空闲态或非激活态的测量间隔，可以由网络指示、协议约定和终端选择至少一种获得。
可选的，所述终端在所述初始下行BWP外接收所述下行定位参考信号包括：若所述下行定位参考信号与第一信号在同一个符号重复或碰撞或传输，所述终端同时接收下行定位参考信号与第一信号，其中，下行定位参考信号在初始下行BWP外，第一信号在初始下行BWP内。所述第一信号包括以下至少之一：SIB1，除所述SIB1之外的其他SIB(Other SIB)，Msg2，MSg4，MsgB，调度SIB1的PDCCH，SSB。可选的，终端在同一个符号接收下行定位参考信号与第一信号属于终端能力，终端需要上报该能力至网络设备。
5)所述终端根据网络侧设备指示，协议约定或所述终端的选择，执行BWP切换，在切换后的BWP上接收所述下行定位参考信号。
可选的，若下行定位参考信号位于初始下行BWP外，和/或，下行定位参考信号的参数配置与初始下行BWP不同，所述终端根据网络侧设备指示，协议约定或所述终端的选择，执行BWP切换，在切换后的BWP上接收所述下行定位参考信号。
目前，基于随机接入小数据传输(RA-SDT)的方法中，允许UE在竞争 解决成功后，到RRC释放(release)消息之间的一段时间，监听C-RNTI加扰的物理下行控制信道(Physical Downlink Control Channel，PDCCH)。本申请实施例中，在UE上报定位数据时，同时指示定位数据是否有后续数据传输以及数据的大小等，以便于网络侧设备以C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH调度后续的定位数据。
可选的，本发明中C-RNTI还可以用其他RNTI代替，包含但不限于I-RNTI(非激活态的RNTI)，或者定位专用RNTI等等。
本申请实施例中，可选的，所述位置相关信息包括：第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示后续数据传输的信息，用于辅助网络侧设备执行后续的定位流程，如辅助网络侧设备确认后续是否需要调度上行数据传输。
所述后续数据传输的信息包括以下至少之一：
后续是否有数据传输；
后续数据传输的大小；
后续数据传输的周期；
后续数据传输是否需要ACK反馈；
后续待传输数据的业务特性；
后续待传输数据的类型，所述类型包含以下至少之一：定位相关数据或非定位相关数据(比如业务数据)，控制面数据或者用户面数据，信令无线承载(SRB1，SRB1或SRB0)、非接入层(NAS)或者数据无线承载(DRB)数据。
可选的，上报位置相关信息之后还包括：在网络侧设备配置的PDCCH调度的PUSCH上传输后续待传输数据。
可选的，所述网络侧设备配置的PDCCH由C-RNTI加扰。
可选的，所述网络侧设备配置的PDCCH和所述网络侧设备配置的PDCCH调度的PUSCH，位于所述位置相关信息上报或者竞争解决消息之后，在RRC释放消息之前。
可选的，所述网络侧设备配置的PDCCH中携带调度的上行数据的类型 指示；在网络侧设备配置的PDCCH调度的PUSCH上传输后续待传输数据包括：
在网络侧设备配置的PDCCH调度的PUSCH上传输所述类型指示所指示的类型对应的后续待传输数据。
2、终端侧发起的定位参考信号的配置更新
本申请实施例中，可选的，所述定位方法还包括：所述终端发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示定位参考信号的配置信息需要更新，以告知网络侧设备下行定位参考信号和/或上行定位参考信号的配置信息需要更新。所述定位参考信号包括上行定位参考信号和下行定位参考信号中的至少之一。
可选的，所述配置信息包括以下至少之一：空间波束信息和路损配置信息。
可选的，所述第三指示信息通过SDT方式发送或者所述终端进入连接态(如终端发起RRC连接建立或连接恢复过程进入连接态)之后发送。
可选的，所述第三指示信息还包括：发送所述第三指示信息的理由(如发起SDT的理由)，所述理由包括以下至少之一：所述终端发起的所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新，所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新，所述定位参考信号的配置信息不可用。
可选的，所述第三指示信息指示的定位参考信号为以下粒度之一：
一组或多组所述定位参考信号的配置信息下的定位参考信号；
一个或多个定位参考信号资源；
一个或多个定位参考信号资源集合；
一个或多个TRP下的定位参考信号；
一个或多个频率层下的定位参考信号；
全部频率层下的定位参考信号。
可选的，所述第三指示信息中还包括以下至少之一，以辅助网络侧设备维护空闲态或非激活态的下行定位参考信号和/或上行定位参考信号的配置 信息，如空间波束信息和/或路损配置信息：
服务小区的RRM测量结果；
邻小区的RRM测量结果；
服务小区的定位参考信号的测量结果，包括但不限于CSI-RS、SSB、PRS、TRS至少一种；
邻小区的定位参考信号的测量结果，包括但不限于CSI-RS、SSB、PRS、TRS至少一种。
其中，RRM测量结果可以是小区级别(cell level)的测量结果和/或波束级别(beam level)的测量结果。
可选的，所述测量结果包含以下至少之一：参考信号(SSB和/或CSI-RS)标识，高于门限的N个最好的波束的测量结果，高于门限的N个最好的波束的指示，最佳波束的测量结果，最佳波束指示，首达径参考信号接收功率(Reference Signal Received Power，RSRP)最强的N个波束测量结果，首达径RSRP最强的N个波束指示，N由协议约定、网络侧设备指示或者所述终端选择。
可选的，所述终端发送第三指示信息包括：所述终端在满足以下条件至少之一时，发送第三指示信息：
1)若所述终端检测到跟踪区的调整超过第一跟踪区阈值，且所述终端未进入连接态，发送所述第三指示信息；
跟踪区的调整超过第一跟踪区阈值即跟踪区改变。
可选的，跟踪区的调整可以根据以下方式中的至少之一获得：
终端自动调整跟踪区；
N-TA-offset改变(n-TimingAdvanceOffset指示)，来自网络侧设备指示，如SIB1；
TA command指示，来自网络侧设备指示，如Msg2或MsgB或其他信息。
2)若所述终端检测到前后两次第一测量值之差超过第一测量阈值，且所述终端未进入连接态，发送所述第三指示信息，所述第一测量值包括以下至 少之一：SSB的测量信息，寻呼或Msg2或Msg4或MsgB的测量信息，所述定位参考信号的测量信息；
第一测量值包括以下至少之一：
SSB的测量信息，如RSRP，参考信号接收质量(Reference Signal Received Quality，RSRQ)和/或SSB定时(timing)测量信息；
Paging、Msg2、Msg4或MsgB的测量信息，如RSRP和/或RSRQ；
PRS的测量信息，如RSRP、RSRQ和/或到达时间差(Time Difference of Arrival，TDOA)。
其中，SSB的测量信息可以是cell-level或beam-level的测量信息。PRS的测量信息可以是TRP-level或PRS resource-level或PRS resource set-level的测量信息。
3)若所述终端检测到第二定时器(如Time Alignment Timer)超时，且所述终端未进入连接态，发送所述第三指示信息；
5)若所述终端的驻留小区切换，发送所述第三指示信息；
5)若所述终端的驻留小区切换，且所述下行定位参考信号无法接收、所述位置相关信息无法上报或者所述上行定位参考信号无法发送，发送所述第三指示信息；
下行定位参考信号无法接收、所述位置相关信息无法上报或者所述上行定位参考信号无法发送原因包含以下之一：
与寻呼，随机接入消息，系统消息，SSB等碰撞，上行定位参考信号(SRS)，下行定位参考信号(PRS)或位置相关信息被drop或者忽略；
空闲态非连续接收(Idle Discontinuous Reception，IDRX)配置改变，导致UE发送上行定位参考信号，测量下行定位参考信号或上报位置相关信息的行为改变。
6)若所述终端移出预配置的所述定位参考信号的配置信息生效区域，发送所述第三指示信息。
可选的，所述预配置的所述定位参考信号的配置信息生效区域为某个小 区，某个小区列表，或者，某个或某些SSB覆盖的区域。
本申请的一些实施例中，可选的，所述终端发送第三指示信息之后还包括：所述终端在空闲态或非激活态接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息包括以下至少之一：
定位参考信号的可用性信息或者所述定位参考信号的配置信息的可用性信息；
定位参考信号的配置信息的更新信息；
其中，所述定位参考信号包括以下至少之一：所述上行定位参考信号和所述下行定位参考信号。
可选的，所述终端发送第三指示信息之后还包括：
所述终端启动第三定时器，在所述第三定时器超时之前，接收所述第一指示信息。
本申请实施例中，可选的，上报位置相关信息包括：
上报测量信息，所述测量信息包括以下至少之一：
服务小区的RRM测量结果；
邻小区的RRM测量结果；
服务小区的定位参考信号的测量结果；
邻小区的定位参考信号的测量结果。
上报上述测量信息以辅助网络侧设备维护空闲态或非激活态的下行定位参考信号和/或上行定位参考信号的配置信息，配置信息包含但不限于：空间波束信息和/或路损配置信息等等。
可选的，通过SDT方式(如通过CG-based SDT方式)上报或者进入连接态(如UE发起RRC连接建立或恢复过程，进入连接态)上报所述测量信息。
可选的，所述终端周期性上报所述测量信息。
可选的，所述终端周期性上报所述测量信息之前还包括：
所述终端接收所述测量信息的上报配置，所述上报配置包括但不限于以 下至少之一：
上报周期；
周期偏移；
周期数；
上报的测量结果的内容，如RSRP等。
执行RRM测量关联的小区标识等等。
可选的，所述终端接收所述测量信息的上报配置包括以下至少之一：
所述终端在广播消息中获得所述测量信息的上报配置；
所述终端在RRC专用消息中获得所述测量信息的上报配置；
所述终端在RRC释放消息中获得所述测量信息的上报配置。
可选的，所述上行定位参考信号包括：非周期SRS或者半持续SRS。
上述实施例中提到，基于随机接入小数据传输(RA-SDT)的方法中，允许UE在竞争解决成功后，到RRC释放(release)消息之间的一段时间，监听C-RNTI加扰的物理下行控制信道(Physical Downlink Control Channel，PDCCH)。本申请实施例中，可以采用C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH触发非周期SRS的发送，以辅助网络设备完成上行定位测量。
可选的，发送非周期SRS包括以下至少之一：
所述非周期SRS由C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH触发发送；
在由C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH和/或非周期SRS在竞争解决成功之后，RRC释放消息之前发送。
该方案适用于事件触发定位，比如事件发生，触发UE向网络侧设备发送上行定位请求及非周期SRS触发请求。网络侧设备在接收到该请求后，在竞争解决成功后和RRC释放信令之前的这段时间，触发非周期SRS的发送。
可选的，发送半持续SRS包括以下至少之一：
所述半持续SRS由网络侧设备调度的PDSCH(如PDSCH承载的媒体接入控制(Media Access Control，MAC)控制单元(Control Element，CE))激活发送，以辅助网络侧设备完成上行定位测量；
在所述网络侧设备调度的PDSCH和/或所述半持续SRS在竞争解决成功之后，RRC释放消息之前接收。
可选的，所述PDSCH由C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH调度。
可选的，所述半持续SRS的生效时间在竞争解决成功之后，RRC释放消息之前。
可选的，发送上行定位参考信号之前还包括：所述终端通过SDT方式(如RA-SDT方式)发送请求信息，所述请求信息用于请求网络侧设备触发非周期SRS或者激活半持续SRS，所述请求信息包含以下至少之一：
非周期SRS触发请求或者半持续SRS激活请求；
上行定位请求；
事件信息。
所述事件信息包含但不限于：区域事件、动作事件等等。区域事件是指UE检测到自己进入、离开或位于指定目标区域范围(如区域小区list/RNA/TAC)。动作事件是指UE检测到自己由之前的位置移动超过某个预定义的线性距离。
可选的，所述请求信息由RRC恢复请求消息携带。
可选的，所述请求消息通过所述RRC恢复请求消息中的恢复原因携带，如a-SRS request,sp-SRS request。
可选的，所述请求信息中还包括：是否需要网络侧设备反馈的指示信息。比如：当请求信息中包含需要网络侧设备反馈时，则UE之后会接收网络侧设备反馈，表示网络侧设备可以触发非周期SRS或半持续SRS，或者网络侧设备不可以触发非周期SRS或半持续SRS。
可选的，通过SDT方式发送请求信息包括：当事件发生时，通过SDT方式发送请求信息，所述事件包括但不限于以下至少之一：区域事件，动作事件。
可选的，通过SDT方式发送请求信息之后还包括：
接收网络侧设备发送的第二反馈信息，所述第二反馈信息包括网络侧设 备是否触发非周期SRS或激活半持续SRS的指示信息。
可选的，所述第二反馈信息通过RRC释放消息携带，或者，通过PDCCH携带，或者，通过PDSCH携带，PDCCH和PDSCH在竞争解决成功后，RRC释放信令之前接收。
可选的，所述定位方法还包括：接收所述非周期SRS或者半持续SRS的配置信息，所述配置信息通过以下方式之一携带：系统信息，之前的RRC释放消息，之前的RRC专用消息。
本申请实施例中，可选的，所述定位方法还包括：所述终端发送第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示上行定位参考信号定时变化(如SRS timing change)，以辅助网络设备准确测量上行定位参考信号以及准确定位。
可选的，所述终端发送第四指示信息包括以下之一：
所述终端通过SDT方式(如通过CG-based SDT和/或RACH-based SDT方式)发送所述第四指示信息；
所述终端进入连接态(如UE发起RRC连接建立/恢复过程，进入连接态)发送所述第四指示信息。
可选的，所述第四指示信息通过RRC恢复请求消息携带。
可选的，所述第四指示信息通过RRC恢复请求消息中的恢复原因携带。
可选的，所述第四指示信息中还包括：
上行定位参考信号定时变化的量；
导致上行定位参考信号定时变化的原因，所述原因包括以下至少之一：所述终端的驻留小区切换或小区重选，所述终端自动调整上行定位参考信号定时，所述终端接收到驻留小区的定时提前命令。
可选的，所述终端发送第四指示信息包括：
在满足以下条件中的至少之一时，发送所述第四指示信息：所述终端的驻留小区切换或小区重选，所述终端自动调整上行定位参考信号定时，所述终端接收到驻留小区的定时提前(Timing advance)命令。
可选的，上述导致上行定位参考信号定时变化的原因也是触发UE指示 上行定位参考信号定时变化的事件信息。
本申请实施例中，可选的，UE指示上行定位参考信号定时变化至服务gNB(或驻留gNB)和/或位置服务器。再由服务gNB(或驻留gNB)和/或位置服务器发送至参与定位的其他gNB。
可选的，当定时变化超过某个门限，UE指示上行定位参考信号定时变化至网络设备。门限可以由协议约定，网络指示/预配置，终端选择至少一种确定。
一般情况下，在空闲态或非激活态的UE会周期性地醒来，监听寻呼(paging)消息，这个周期即为IDRX周期。为了省电，可能需要UE尽量在寻呼的附近测量下行定位参考信号，或者发送上行定位参考信号，或者上报位置相关信息，以减少UE醒来的次数，节省功耗。那么，需要定义UE测量下行定位参考信号，或者发送上行定位参考信号，或者上报位置相关信息，与IDRX的关系。另外，随着驻留小区的切换，IDRX配置可能会发生变化，那么还需要上报驻留小区切换信息至网络侧设备，以辅助网络侧设备确定新的驻留小区内的UE测量和发送的行为。同时，需要定位区域内的gNB将自己的IDRX配置发送至位置服务器，以帮助位置服务器确认后续的行为。
基于上述描述，可选的，所述定位方法还包括：所述终端发送第五指示信息，所述第五指示信息用于指示驻留小区变化，以辅助网络侧设备执行后续的资源分配或定位流程。
可选的，服务gNB(或驻留gNB)可以获得UE的驻留小区变化的信息，驻留小区的变化信息还可以由服务gNB(或驻留gNB)发送至位置服务器。
可选的，所述终端发送第五指示信息包括以下之一：
所述终端通过SDT方式(如通过CG-based SDT和/或RACH-based SDT方式)发送所述第五指示信息；
所述终端进入连接态(如UE发起RRC连接建立或恢复过程，进入连接态)发送所述第五指示信息。
可选的，所述第五指示信息通过RRC恢复请求消息携带。
可选的，所述第五指示信息通过RRC恢复请求消息中的恢复原因携带。
可选的，所述第五指示信息中还包括驻留小区的标识信息。
可选的，所述终端发送第五指示信息包括：若所述终端的驻留小区切换，发送所述第五指示信息。即UE驻留小区变化的事件触发UE发送该第五指示信息。
可选的，所述定位方法还包括：若所述终端的驻留小区切换，且所述终端无法执行以下操作中的至少之一，所述终端发起随机接入进入连接态或者发送第三指示信息：
所述终端无法发送上行定位参考信号；
所述终端无法测量下行定位参考信号；
所述终端无法上报位置相关信息；
其中，所述第三指示信息用于指示定位参考信号的配置信息需要更新，所述定位参考信号包括上行定位参考信号和下行定位参考信号中的至少之一。
可选的，终端发起随机接入进入连接态或发送第三指示信息中，可携带上述原因。
可选的，UE无法发送上行定位参考信号，和/或测量下行定位参考信号，和/或UE上报位置相关信息的原因如下：
与寻呼,随机接入消息，系统消息，SSB等碰撞，SRS，PRS或定位信息被drop或者忽略；
IDRX配置改变，导致UE发送上行定位参考信号，测量下行定位参考信号或上报定位位置相关信息的行为改变。
可选的，UE指示驻留小区变化至服务gNB(或驻留gNB)和/或位置服务器。再由服务gNB(或驻留gNB)和/或位置服务器发送至参与定位的其他gNB。
本申请实施例中，可选的，终端在空闲态或非激活态执行定位操作还包括以下至少之一：
若待发送的上行定位参考信号的时域位置距离寻呼时机超过距离X(或 者超过一个时间窗X的范围)，所述终端忽略所述待发送的上行定位参考信号；
若下行定位参考信号的时域位置距离寻呼时机超过距离X，所述终端忽略所述下行定位参考信号的测量；
若位置相关信息上报的时域位置距离寻呼时机超过距离X，所述终端忽略所述位置相关信息的上报；
若待发送的上行定位参考信号的时域位置距离所述下行定位参考信号的时域位置超过距离X，所述终端忽略所述待发送的上行定位参考信号。
可选的，所述X由网络侧设备指示、协议约定或所述终端选择。
可选的，X的单位可以是ms，s，时隙(slot)。
可选的，X与IDRX周期有关，比如IDRX周期的一半等等。
可选的，所述寻呼时机为驻留小区的寻呼时机。
RNA区域(或RAN跟踪区或定位信号配置生效区域)内的gNB可提前将IDRX配置信息发送至位置服务器。其中，IDRX配置信息包含但不限于：IDRX周期、寻呼时机位置、寻呼帧位置、UE的国际移动用户识别码(International Mobile Subscriber Identity，IMSI)等。
gNB发送上述信息前，接收位置服务器的请求，请求上述IDRX配置信息。
位置服务器获取IDRX配置信息的作用如下：
1)辅助位置服务器确定定位的辅助信息，如PRS配置，使得PRS配置与IDRX配置更匹配一些，以节省功耗；
2)UE在切换驻留小区后，IDRX配置发生改变，会导致UE发送上行定位参考信号，测量下行定位参考信号或上报位置相关信息的行为改变。网络侧设备如果提前得知IDRX配置，那么网络侧设备一旦知道UE切换了驻留小区，那么就可以预知UE发送上行定位参考信号，测量下行定位参考信号或上报位置相关信息的行为如何改变。
比如，由于驻留小区切换导致某些SRS时机无法发送，那么位置服务 器就可以通知邻区gNB，释放某些位置的SRS资源，减少资源浪费。或者，驻留小区切换导致某些SRS时机可以发送SRS，那么位置服务器就可以通知邻区gNB，在特定的位置接收这些SRS时机。
进一步的，在下行和上行定位中，UE在发送上行定位参考信号时，上行定位参考信号的空间波束关系(spatial relation)，与下行定位参考信号有关。即UE可以使用接收某个TRP下行定位参考信号的波束，发送上行定位参考信号至该TRP。
进一步的，UE发送上行定位参考信号前，接收上行定位参考信号的配置。其中，所述配置信息中以下配置信息至少之一可以由位置服务器推荐至基站，再由基站配置给UE：周期、周期偏移、上行定位参考信号重复配置、上行定位参考信号一个周期的持续时间等等。可选的，上行定位参考信号的周期可以配置为下行定位参考信号周期的整数倍。可选的，所述配置信息用于尽量与下行定位参考信号匹配，以减少在下行和上行定位中UE醒来的次数，节省UE功耗。
本申请实施例中，可选的，所述接收并测量下行定位参考信号包括：根据下行定位参考信号与同步信号块SSB的空间波束关系，接收并测量下行定位参考信号；
其中，下行定位参考信号与同步信号块SSB的空间波束关系，由网络侧设备指示的下行定位参考信号与SSB的空间准共址(Quasi Co-Location，QCL)关系获得；或者，根据下行定位参考信号资源与下行定位参考信号资源所在TRP下同步信号块突发(SSB burst)中实际发送的SSB默认关系获得。
默认关系为：该TRP下，PRS资源集中包含N个PRS资源，SSB burst中实际发送的SSB数也为N个，那么PRS资源与SSB有一一对应的空间关系。比如PRS resource ID 0的PRS resource对应SSB index为0的SSB，PRS resource ID 1的PRS resource对应SSB index为1的SSB，…。当然本申请不对PRS resource ID与SSB index做特殊限制，还可以是其他对应关系。
或者，默认关系为PRS资源集包含N个PRS资源，SSB burst中实际发 送的SSB数为M个，M是N的整数倍(或者M>＝N)。那么N个PRS资源可以与M个SSB中的某N个SSB有一一对应的空间关系。N个SSB可以连续或非连续，M中的哪N个SSB可以由协议约定或网络指示。
下行定位参考信号与某个SSB的空间QCL关系，可表示下行定位参考信号与该SSB从相同的发送波束发出。
可选的，下行定位参考信号资源与下行定位参考信号资源所在TRP下同步信号块突发(SSB burst)中实际发送的SSB默认关系可以用于广播的定位辅助数据中。
本申请实施例中，解决了空闲态或激活态下的下行及上行定位中的配置、激活和/或更新，从而使空闲态或激活态下的下行及上行定位能够更有效进行。
本申请实施例还提供一种定位方法，包括：
终端在空闲态、非激活态或连接态执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括：
上报位置相关信息，所述位置相关信息包括定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。
其中，所述关联关系用于辅助网络侧设备进行定位计算，进而减少或消除时间误差组对定位精度的影响，提高定位精度。
定位测量结果与时间误差组(Timing Error Group，TEG)的关联关系包含以下之一：定位测量结果与UE Rx TEG的关联关系，定位测量结果与UE RxTx TEG的关联关系，定位测量结果与{Rx TEG,Tx TEG}的关联关系。
上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系包含以下之一：
上行定位参考信号与UE Tx TEG的关联关系，上行定位参考信号与UE RxTx TEG的关联关系，
上行定位参考信号与UE{Rx TEG,Tx TEG}的关联关系。
其中，位于相同时间误差组的测量结果和/或上行定位参考信号，具有相同的接收时间误差和/或发送时间误差。
其中，关联关系可以用关联的TEG标识ID表示，或者相同的TEG的下 行定位参考信号测量结果和/或上行定位参考信号分为一组，或者用其他方式表示。
可选的，UE指示上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系还包含：UE还可以指示上行定位参考信号(如SRS)关联的TEG的变化至网络设备。可选的，以SRS为例，TEG的变化可以是SRS发送过程中某个SRS instance关联的TEG相比于上一个SRS instance关联的TEG发生了变化，也可以是相比于DL+UL定位测量结果中(如Rx-Tx time difference)Tx timing(或SRS)关联的TEG发生了变化。
本申请实施例中，可选的，在下行和上行定位方法中(DL+UL positioning method)，所述上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系包含在定位测量结果中。
下行和上行定位定位方法(DL+UL positioning method)，包含但不限于ECID，多往返时延(multi Round-Trip Time，multi-RTT)定位方法等。
下行和上行定位方法(DL+UL positioning method)的方法中，UE可以指示定位测量结果与UE Rx TEG的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与UE Tx TEG的关联关系。除此之外，由于在下行和上行定位方法中包含了下行测量与上行发送，时间误差可以是下行测量误差与上行发送误差的和。
可选的，UE还可以进一步指示Rx TEG与Tx TEG结合(即定位测量结果与SRS发送结合)后与总体时间误差组(如与RxTx TEG)的关联关系或者总体的时间误差的关联关系。比如，UE指示了定位测量结果与2个Rx TEG(Rx TEG0,Rx TEG1)的关系，和上行定位参考信号与2个Tx TEG(Tx TEG0,Tx TEG1)的关系。UE可进一步指示2组Rx TEG与2组Tx TEG结合后的总体TEG的关联关系或总体时间误差的关联关系。不同的总体时间误差组，总体时间误差值不同。比如，指示Rx TEG0+Tx TEG0与Rx TEG1+Tx TEG0的总体误差相同(或总体误差均小于某个阈值)，或者位于相同的总体时间误差组0；指示Rx TEG0+Tx TEG1位于总体时间误差组1；指示Rx TEG1+Tx TEG2位于总体时间误差组2。总体时间误差组0，1，2的误差值不同(或者，说 不能假设总体时间误差组0，1，2的误差均小于某个阈值)。
可选的，下行和上行的定位方法中，UE可以指示测量结果(如Rx-Tx time difference)与RxTx TEG的关联关系。一种实施方式如下：
在一个RxTx TEG中，UE可以指示至少一组{PRS resources,SRS resources}(PRS资源与SRS资源的组合，或者下行定位参考信号资源与上行定位参考信号资源的组合)，上述至少一组位于相同的RxTx TEG中，或者共享相同RxTx TEG ID。其中，不同组之间的PRS resource与SRS resource不位于相同的RxTx TEG中(即组A的PRS resources与组B的SRS resources不位于相同的RxTx TEG)。其中，PRS resources用于确定Rx-Tx time difference measurement中Rx time；SRS resources用于确定Rx-Tx time difference measurement中的Tx time。
可选的，当SRS resource(s)A关联的TEG(如Tx TEG,或RxTx TEG)改变时，UE可指示包含SRS resource(s)A的1个或多个{PRS resources,SRS resources}组中，SRS resource(s)A与所有PRS resources(即1个或多个{PRS resources,SRS resource(s)A}组合)关联的RxTx TEG的变化(比如从RxTx TEG 0变为RxTx TEG1)。其中，SRS resource(s)A是一个或多个TEG发生变化的SRS resource
可选的，当PRS resource(s)A关联的TEG(如Rx TEG,或RxTx TEG)改变时，UE指示包含PRS resource(s)A的1个或多个{PRS resources,SRS resources}组中，PRS resource(s)A与所有的SRS resources(即1个或多个{PRS resource(s)A,SRS resources}组合)关联的RxTx TEG的变化(比如从RxTx TEG 0变为RxTx TEG2)。
可选的，UE上报定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，还包含以下方式至少一种：
(一)UE上报某个TRP下多个下行定位参考信号资源(PRS resource)的测量结果与时间误差组(如UE Rx TEG)的关联关系。其中，在上报的关联关系中，每个时间误差组至少关联1个定位参考信号资源的测量结果。当 满足第一预设条件时，UE必须上报目标时间误差组关联的至少一个定位参考信号资源的测量结果及关联关系，目标时间误差组是UE支持的多个时间误差组中任意一个。
所述第一预设条件包含但不限于以下之一：
目标时间误差组关联的下行定位参考信号资源的测量结果的质量超过某个门限；比如：首径的RSRP值超过某个门限；
目标时间误差组关联的下行定位参考信号资源的测量结果为视距径(Line of Sight，LOS)的测量结果，或者目标时间误差组关联的下行定位参考信号资源的测量结果的LOS概率高于某个门限；
多个时间误差组关联的下行定位参考信号资源的对应信道分布相近，多个时间误差组即为目标时间误差组。信道分布相似比如：功率时延谱分布相近(如功率时延谱中多条径的相对位置相近或一致)。
上述UE行为可以由网络指示、协议约定、UE选择至少一项确定。比如，网络设置一个‘使能(enable)’开关，当‘使能(enable)’开关指示为‘on’(或者present，或者指示为二进制‘1’等等)，则UE需要遵循上述UE行为，否则UE无需遵循上述UE行为。
可选的，另一种实施方式，当满足第一预设条件，UE可以上报目标时间误差组关联的至少一个定位参考信号资源的测量结果及关联关系，和/或上报多个目时间误差组的时间误差的差值，和/或在上报的测量结果中补偿多个目时间误差组的时间误差的差值。所述UE行为可以由网络指示、协议约定、UE选择至少一种方式确定。
可选的，UE可以上报目标时间误差组关联的至少一个定位参考信号资源的测量结果及关联关系，和/或上报多个目时间误差组的时间误差的差值，和/或在上报的测量结果中补偿多个目时间误差组的时间误差的差值。所述UE行为可以由网络指示、协议约定、UE选择至少一种方式确定。
(二)UE上报某个TRP下目标下行定位参考信号资源(PRS resource)的测量结果与多个时间误差组(如UE Rx TEG)的关联关系。在满足第二预 设条件的情况下，终端上报所述目标定位测量结果与多个TEG的关联关系；
其中，所述第二预设条件包括但不限于以下至少一项：
存在多个TEG关联的下行定位测量结果的质量超过某个门限；比如：首径的RSRP值超过某个门限；
存在多个TEG关联的下行定位测量结果为视距径LOS的测量结果，或者下行定位测量结果的LOS概率高于某个门限；
终端进行接收波束扫描时，不同的接收波束关联了不同的TEG，且多个接收波束对应的下行定位测量结果的质量超过某个门限。
目标定位参考信号资源关联的多个TEG对应信道分布相近。信道分布相似比如：功率时延谱分布相近(如功率时延谱中多条径的相对位置相近或一致)。
上述UE行为可以由网络指示、协议约定、UE选择至少一项确定。比如，网络设置一个‘使能(enable)’开关，当‘使能(enable)’开关指示为‘on’(或者present，或者指示为二进制‘1’等等)，则UE需要遵循上述UE行为，否则UE无需遵循上述UE行为。
可选的，当满足第一和/或第二预设条件，UE可以上报多个定位参考信号资源的测量结果与不同时间误差组关联关系，和/或上报定位参考信号资源的测量结果与不同时间误差组的关联关系，和/或上报多个时间误差组的时间误差的差值，和/或在上报的测量结果中补偿多个目时间误差组的时间误差的差值。所述UE行为可以由网络指示、协议约定、UE选择至少一种方式确定。
可选的，UE可以上报多个定位参考信号资源的测量结果与不同时间误差组关联关系，和/或上报定位参考信号资源的测量结果与不同时间误差组的关联关系，和/或上报多个时间误差组的时间误差的差值，和/或在上报的测量结果中补偿多个目时间误差组的时间误差的差值。所述UE行为可以由网络指示、协议约定、UE选择至少一种方式确定。
另外，本发明方案中，当网络设备为基站时，基站(如gNB)测量上行定位参考信号后，还需要向位置服务器(如LMF)上报上行定位测量结果。其 中，基站(如gNB)上报上行定位测量结果还包含：
gNB上报上行定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，包含：UE上报某个UE多个上行定位参考信号资源(SRS resource)的测量结果与时间误差组(如UE Tx TEG)的关联关系。其中，在上报的关联关系中，每个时间误差组(如UE Tx TEG)至少关联1个上行定位参考信号资源的测量结果。当满足第三预设条件时，gNB必须上报目标时间误差组关联的至少一个上行定位参考信号资源的测量结果及关联关系，目标时间误差组是UE支持的多个时间误差组(如UE Tx TEG)中任意一个。
所述第三预设条件包含但不限于以下之一：
目标时间误差组关联的上行定位参考信号资源的测量结果的质量超过某个门限；比如：首径的RSRP值超过某个门限；
目标时间误差组关联的上行定位参考信号资源的测量结果为视距径LOS的测量结果，或者目标时间误差组关联的下行定位参考信号资源的测量结果的LOS概率高于某个门限；
多个时间误差组关联的上行定位参考信号资源的对应信道分布相近，多个时间误差组即为目标时间误差组。信道分布相似比如：功率时延谱分布相近(如功率时延谱中多条径的相对位置相近或一致)。
上述gNB行为可以由网络(如LMF)指示、协议约定、gNB实现至少一项确定。比如，网络(LMF)设置一个‘使能(enable)’开关，当‘使能(enable)’开关指示为‘on’(或者present，或者指示为二进制‘1’等等)，则gNB需要遵循上述行为，否则gNB无需遵循上述UE行为。
可选的，另一种实施方式，当满足第三预设条件，gNB可以上报目标时间误差组关联的至少一个上行定位参考信号资源的测量结果及关联关系，和/或上报多个目时间误差组的时间误差的差值，和/或在上报的测量结果中补偿多个目时间误差组的时间误差的差值。所述gNB行为可以由网络指示、协议约定、UE选择至少一种方式确定。
可选的，gNB可以上报目标时间误差组关联的至少一个上行定位参考信 号资源的测量结果及关联关系，和/或上报多个目时间误差组的时间误差的差值，和/或在上报的测量结果中补偿多个目时间误差组的时间误差的差值。所述gNB行为可以由网络指示、协议约定、UE选择至少一种方式确定。
其中，上述第一/第二/第三预设条件，可以由网络指示、协议约定、UE/基站选择至少一种方式确定。
下面结合具体实施例，对本申请的定位方法进行说明。
本申请实施例一：
本实施例给出了网络侧设备发起定位参考信号配置更新的流程，包括以下步骤：
步骤1：On-demand PRS配置中，LMF需要更新on-demand PRS配置信息至多个UE，包含处于连接态的UE和空闲态或非激活态的多个UE。
步骤2：LMF将On-demand请求信息，发给AMF，AMF再发给某个gNB。
步骤3：gNB判断请求信息大小是否超过门限，如果未超过门限，跳到步骤4。若超过门限，发起UE进入连接态的过程。
步骤4：gNB发送寻呼消息，携带定位参考信号配置更新。寻呼可以是RAN-paging或者是SA-paging(核心网寻呼)。
步骤5：UE接收到了定位参考信号配置更新指示，包含：定位参考信号更新以及无需进入连接态的指示。
步骤6：UE需要通过上行SDT的方式反馈自己收到了定位参考信号配置更新，该上行SDT在RRCresumerequest消息中携带，且RRCresumerequest中的resumecause中，携带‘定位参考信号配置更新反馈’，表示该上行SDT流程是为了反馈定位参考信号配置更新发起的。
步骤7：gNB收到了UE的SDT中的反馈，通过RRC release消息携带更新的定位参考信号配置，发送给UE。
本申请实施方式二：
本实施例给出了非周期SRS传输的一个实施方式。
方式一：UE发送请求至gNB。
步骤1：UE监测到事件发生，如动作事件或区域事件发生，事件触发UE发起非周期SRS发送的请求。
步骤2：UE通过RA-SDT发送非周期SRS请求至gNB，请求中携带原因：如事件信息和/或上行定位请求和/或非周期SRS发送请求。
步骤3：gNB收到UE的请求，若可以触发非周期SRS，则发起非周期SRS触发流程，否则，跳至步骤4。
3.1 gNB向UE发送PDCCH，用于触发非周期SRS。
3.2 gNB向位置服务器(通过NRPPa)发送非周期SRS相关信息(如非周期SRS发送时间)，之后位置服务器向参与定位的其他gNB发送非周期SRS相关信息。或者，gNB向参与定位的其他gNB(如通过Xn)接口发送非周期SRS相关信息。
步骤4：gNB发送响应至UE，包含了无法触发非周期SRS的信息，响应可以由RRC释放消息携带。
方式二：UE发送请求至位置服务器LMF。
步骤1：UE监测到事件发生，如动作事件或区域事件发生，事件触发UE发起非周期SRS发送的请求。
步骤2：UE通过RA-SDT发送非周期SRS的请求至位置服务器LMF，请求中携带原因：如事件信息和/或上行定位请求和/或非周期SRS发送请求。
步骤3：LMF收到UE的请求，将请求通过NRPPa再发送给gNB。
步骤4：gNB若可以触发非周期SRS，则发起非周期SRS触发流程。否则，跳至5或6。
4.1 gNB向UE发送PDCCH，用于触发非周期SRS。
4.2 gNB向位置服务器(通过NRPPa)发送非周期SRS相关信息(如非周期SRS发送时间)，之后位置服务器向参与定位的其他gNB发送非周期SRS相关信息。或者，gNB向参与定位的其他gNB(如通过Xn)接口发送非周期SRS相关信息。
步骤5：gNB发送响应至位置服务器，包含了无法触发非周期SRS的信 息，响应可以由NRPPa消息携带。
●5.1位置服务器再将相应发送至UE。本条消息可以是LPP消息，由RRC释放消息携带。
步骤6：gNB发送响应至UE，包含了无法触发非周期SRS的信息，响应可以由RRC释放消息携带。
请参考图7，本申请实施例还提供一种定位方法，包括：
步骤71：网络侧设备执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括以下至少之一：
向空闲态或非激活态的终端发送下行定位参考信号；
接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的位置相关信息；
测量空闲态或非激活态的终端发送的上行定位参考信号。
可选的，网络侧设备可以是基站或位置服务器。
可选的，当网络设备为基站时，可以向终端发送下行定位参考信号，和/或，接收上行定位参考信号，和/或接收终端上报的位置相关信息。可选的，基站还可以进一步将终端上报的位置相关信息发送至位置服务器(比如：位置相关信息经过基站透传，最终达到位置服务器)。可选的，基站在完成上行定位参考信号的接收或测量后，还可以把上行定位参考信号的测量结果发送至位置服务器。这里，基站可以是服务基站(或服务小区基站)、邻基站(或邻区基站)、驻留小区基站之一。
可选的，当网络设备为位置服务器时，可以接收终端上报的位置相关信息和/或基站测量的上行定位参考信号的测量结果。
可选的，所述方法还包括：
所述网络侧设备向空闲态或非激活态的终端发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息包括以下至少之一：
定位参考信号的可用性信息或者所述定位参考信号的配置信息的可用性信息；
定位参考信号的配置信息的更新信息；
其中，所述定位参考信号包括以下至少之一：所述上行定位参考信号和所述下行定位参考信号。
可选的，所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新信息包括以下至少之一：
所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息；
更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
可选的，用于指示所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息或更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息包括以下至少之一：
所述定位参考信号的配置信息的开启或关闭；
所述定位参考信号的带宽的增加或减少；
所述定位参考信号的周期的增加或减少；
所述定位参考信号的静默配置的变化；
所述定位参考信号的空间关系配置变化；
所述定位参考信号的路损配置变化。
可选的，所述第一指示信息指示的定位参考信号为以下粒度之一：
一组或多组所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号；
一个或多个定位参考信号资源；
一个或多个定位参考信号资源集合；
一个或多个TRP下的定位参考信号；
一个或多个频率层下的定位参考信号；
全部频率层下的定位参考信号。
可选的，第一指示信息通过以下方式中的至少之一携带：
在寻呼PDCCH中携带；
在寻呼PDCCH调度的寻呼PDSCH中携带；
在寻呼提前指示中携带；
在随机接入过程或小数据传输过程中携带；
在广播消息中携带；
在RRC释放消息中携带；
在网络侧设备配置的下行监听机会和/或监听窗口对应的PDCCH和/或PDSCH中携带；
在从网络侧设备配置的下行调度资源PDSCH中携带。
可选的，所述第一指示信息由寻呼PDCCH中的短消息的比特位表示，或者，由寻呼PDCCH中的保留比特位表示。
可选的，所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息在寻呼PDCCH中携带，更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息在寻呼PDCCH调度的寻呼PDSCH中携带。
可选的，所述第一指示信息还包括是否进入连接态并更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
可选的，所述网络侧设备向空闲态或非激活态的终端发送第一指示信息之后还包括：
所述网络侧设备接收所述终端发送的第一反馈信息，所述第一反馈信息用于指示已收到所述第一指示信息。
可选的，所述第一反馈信息包括以下至少之一：
反馈理由，所述反馈理由包括以下至少之一：所述定位参考信号的可用性指示反馈，所述定位参考信号的配置信息更新反馈，网络侧设备发起的所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新反馈；
所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新响应，所述更新响应用于响应所述第一指示信息中的所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息。
可选的，所述网络侧设备接收所述终端发送的第一反馈信息之后还包括：
所述网络侧设备向所述终端发送更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
可选的，所述更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息通过以下方式之一携带：
在RRC释放消息中携带；
在C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH调度的PDSCH中携带；
在RRC专用消息中携带。
可选的，所述位置相关信息包括：第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示后续数据传输的信息，所述后续数据传输的信息包括以下至少之一：
后续是否有数据传输；
后续数据传输的大小；
后续数据传输的周期；
后续数据传输是否需要肯定确认(Acknowledgement，ACK)反馈；
后续待传输数据的业务特性；
后续待传输数据的类型，所述类型包含以下至少之一：定位相关数据或非定位相关数据，控制面数据或者用户面数据，信令无线承载、非接入层或者数据无线承载数据。
可选的，所述方法还包括：
所述网络侧设备在网络侧设备配置的PDCCH调度的PUSCH上接收后续待传输数据。
可选的，所述方法还包括：
所述网络侧设备接收所述终端发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示定位参考信号的配置信息需要更新，所述定位参考信号包括上行定位参考信号和下行定位参考信号中的至少之一。
可选的，所述第三指示信息还包括：发送所述第三指示信息的理由，所述理由包括以下至少之一：所述终端发起的所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新，所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新，所述定位参考信号的配置信息不可用。
可选的，所述第三指示信息指示的定位参考信号为以下粒度之一：
一组或多组所述定位参考信号的配置信息下的定位参考信号；
一个或多个定位参考信号资源；
一个或多个定位参考信号资源集合；
一个或多个TRP下的定位参考信号；
一个或多个频率层下的定位参考信号；
全部频率层下的定位参考信号。
可选的，所述第三指示信息中还包括以下至少之一：
服务小区的RRM测量结果；
邻小区的RRM测量结果；
服务小区的定位参考信号的测量结果；
邻小区的定位参考信号的测量结果。
可选的，所述测量结果包含以下至少之一：参考信号标识，高于门限的N个最好的波束的测量结果，高于门限的N个最好的波束的指示，最佳波束的测量结果，最佳波束指示，首达径RSRP最强的N个波束测量结果，首达径RSRP最强的N个波束指示，N由协议约定、网络侧设备指示或者所述终端选择。
可选的，所述网络侧设备接收所述终端发送第三指示信息之后还包括：
向所述终端发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息包括以下至少之一：
定位参考信号的可用性信息或者所述定位参考信号的配置信息的可用性信息；
定位参考信号的配置信息的更新信息；
其中，所述定位参考信号包括以下至少之一：所述上行定位参考信号和所述下行定位参考信号。
可选的，所述位置相关信息包括：测量信息，所述测量信息包括以下至少之一：
服务小区的RRM测量结果；
邻小区的RRM测量结果；
服务小区的定位参考信号的测量结果；
邻小区的定位参考信号的测量结果。
可选的，所述测量信息由所述终端周期性上报。
可选的，所述方法还包括：
所述网络侧设备向所述终端发送所述测量信息的上报配置，所述上报配 置包括以下至少之一：
上报周期；
周期偏移；
周期数；
上报的测量结果的内容；
执行RRM测量关联的小区标识。
可选的，所述测量信息的上报配置通过以下方式中的至少之一携带：
在广播消息中携带；
在RRC专用消息中携带；
在RRC释放消息中携带。
可选的，所述上行定位参考信号包括：非周期SRS或者半持续SRS。
可选的，接收非周期SRS之前还包括：
通过由C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH向终端发送触发信息，以触发所述终端发送非周期SRS；
其中，在由C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH和/或非周期SRS在竞争解决成功之后，RRC释放消息之前发送。
可选的，接收半持续SRS之前还包括：
通过由网络侧设备调度的PDSCH发送激活信息，以激活所述终端发送半持续SRS；
其中，在所述网络侧设备调度的PDSCH和/或所述半持续SRS在竞争解决成功之后，RRC释放消息之前接收。
可选的，所述方法还包括：
所述网络侧设备接收所述终端通过SDT方式发送的请求信息，所述请求信息用于请求网络侧设备触发非周期SRS或者激活半持续SRS，所述请求信息包含以下至少之一：
非周期SRS触发请求或者半持续SRS激活请求；
上行定位请求；
事件信息。
可选的，所述方法还包括：
所述网络侧设备接收所述终端发送第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示上行定位参考信号定时变化。
可选的，所述第四指示信息中还包括：
上行定位参考信号定时变化的量；
导致上行定位参考信号定时变化的原因，所述原因包括以下至少之一：所述终端的驻留小区切换或小区重选，所述终端自动调整上行定位参考信号定时，所述终端接收到驻留小区的定时提前命令。
可选的，所述方法还包括：
所述网络侧设备接收所述终端发送的第五指示信息，所述第五指示信息用于指示驻留小区变化。
可选的，所述第五指示信息中还包括驻留小区的标识信息。
可选的，接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的位置相关信息包括：
接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。
可选的，在下行和上行定位方法中，所述上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系包含在定位测量结果中。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例提供的定位方法，执行主体可以为定位装置，或者，该定位装置中的用于执行定位方法的控制模块。本申请实施例中以定位装置执行定位方法为例，说明本申请实施例提供的定位装置。
本申请实施例还提供一种定位方法，包括：
执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括：
接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的位置相关信息，所述位置相关信息包括定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。
其中，所述关联关系用于辅助网络侧设备进行定位计算，进而减少或消 除时间误差组对定位精度的影响，提高定位精度。
可选的，在下行和上行定位方法中，所述上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系包含在定位测量结果中。
请参考图8，本申请实施例还提供一种定位装置80，包括：
定位模块81，用于在空闲态或非激活态执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括以下至少之一：
接收并测量下行定位参考信号；上报位置相关信息；
发送上行定位参考信号。
可选的，所述定位装置80还包括：
第一接收模块，用于在空闲态或非激活态接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息包括以下至少之一：
定位参考信号的可用性信息或者所述定位参考信号的配置信息的可用性信息；
定位参考信号的配置信息的更新信息；
其中，所述定位参考信号包括以下至少之一：所述上行定位参考信号和所述下行定位参考信号。
可选的，所述定位装置80还包括：
第一执行模块，用于若所述第一指示信息指示所述定位参考信号不可用，假设所述定位参考信号不存在，或所述定位参考信号未被发送，或所述定位参考信号被停止发送，或不发送所述定位参考信号，或停止发送所述定位参考信号；
或者
第二执行模块，用于若所述第一指示信息指示所述定位参考信号的配置信息不可用，假设所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号不存在，或所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号未被发送，或定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号被停止发送，或不发送所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号，或停止发送所述定位参考信号的配置信 息对应的定位参考信号。
可选的，所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新信息包括以下至少之一：
所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息；
更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
可选的，用于指示所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息或更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息包括以下至少之一：
所述定位参考信号的配置信息的开启或关闭；
所述定位参考信号的带宽的增加或减少；
所述定位参考信号的周期的增加或减少；
所述定位参考信号的静默配置的变化；
所述定位参考信号的空间关系配置变化；
所述定位参考信号的路损配置变化。
可选的，所述第一指示信息指示的定位参考信号为以下粒度之一：
一组或多组所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号；
一个或多个定位参考信号资源；
一个或多个定位参考信号资源集合；
一个或多个TRP下的定位参考信号；
一个或多个频率层下的定位参考信号；
全部频率层下的定位参考信号。
可选的，在空闲态或非激活态接收第一指示信息包括以下至少之一：
在寻呼PDCCH中获得所述第一指示信息；
在寻呼PDCCH调度的寻呼PDSCH中获得所述第一指示信息；
在寻呼提前指示中获得所述第一指示信息；
在随机接入过程或小数据传输过程中获得所述第一指示信息；
在广播消息中获得所述第一指示信息；
在RRC释放消息中获得所述第一指示信息；
根据网络侧设备配置的下行监听机会和/或监听窗口，在PDCCH和/或 PDSCH中获得所述第一指示信息；
从网络侧设备配置的下行调度资源PDSCH中获得所述第一指示信息。
可选的，所述第一指示信息由寻呼PDCCH中的短消息的比特位表示，或者，由寻呼PDCCH中的保留比特位表示。
可选的，在寻呼PDCCH中获得所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息，在寻呼PDCCH调度的寻呼PDSCH中获得更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
可选的，所述第一指示信息还包括是否进入连接态并更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
可选的，所述定位装置80还包括：
第一发起模块，用于若所述第一指示信息包括进入连接态并更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息的指示信息，或者，所述第一指示信息不包括不进入连接态以更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息的指示信息，发起随机接入进入连接态并更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
可选的，所述定位装置80还包括：
第一发送模块，用于发送第一反馈信息，所述第一反馈信息用于指示已收到所述第一指示信息。
可选的，所述第一反馈信息在空闲态或非激活态发送或者所述终端进入连接态之后发送。
可选的，所述第一反馈信息包括以下至少之一：
反馈理由，所述反馈理由包括以下至少之一：所述定位参考信号的可用性指示反馈，所述定位参考信号的配置信息更新反馈，网络侧设备发起的所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新反馈；
所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新响应，所述更新响应用于响应所述第一指示信息中的所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息。
可选的，所述定位装置80还包括：第二接收模块，用于接收更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
可选的，接收更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息包括以下方式之一：
在RRC释放消息中获得更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息；
在C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH调度的PDSCH中获得更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息；
进入连接态之后接收更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
可选的，所述定位装置80还包括：
第三执行模块，用于若所述终端被配置了初始下行BWP，所述终端执行以下之一：
在所述初始下行BWP内接收所述下行定位参考信号；
在所述初始下行BWP内接收与所述初始下行BWP参数配置相同的下行定位参考信号；
若所述下行定位参考信号与第一信号在同一个符号重复或碰撞或传输，所述终端不接收所述下行定位参考信号，所述第一信号包括以下至少之一：SIB1，除所述SIB1之外的其他SIB，Msg2，MSg4，MsgB，调度SIB1的PDCCH，SSB；
所述终端在所述初始下行BWP外接收所述下行定位参考信号；
所述终端根据网络侧设备指示，协议约定或所述终端的选择，执行BWP切换，在切换后的BWP上接收所述下行定位参考信号。
可选的，所述位置相关信息包括：第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示后续数据传输的信息，所述后续数据传输的信息包括以下至少之一：
后续是否有数据传输；
后续数据传输的大小；
后续数据传输的周期；
后续数据传输是否需要ACK反馈；
后续待传输数据的业务特性；
后续待传输数据的类型，所述类型包含以下至少之一：定位相关数据或非定位相关数据，控制面数据或者用户面数据，信令无线承载、非接入层或 者数据无线承载数据。
可选的，所述定位装置80还包括：第二发送模块，用于在网络侧设备配置的PDCCH调度的PUSCH上传输后续待传输数据。
可选的，所述网络侧设备配置的PDCCH中携带调度的上行数据的类型指示；在网络侧设备配置的PDCCH调度的PUSCH上传输后续待传输数据包括：在网络侧设备配置的PDCCH调度的PUSCH上传输所述类型指示所指示的类型对应的后续待传输数据。
可选的，所述定位装置80还包括：
第三发送模块，用于发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示定位参考信号的配置信息需要更新，所述定位参考信号包括上行定位参考信号和下行定位参考信号中的至少之一。
可选的，所述第三指示信息通过SDT方式发送或者所述终端进入连接态之后发送。
可选的，所述第三指示信息还包括：发送所述第三指示信息的理由，所述理由包括以下至少之一：所述终端发起的所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新，所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新，所述定位参考信号的配置信息不可用。
可选的，所述第三指示信息指示的定位参考信号为以下粒度之一：
一组或多组所述定位参考信号的配置信息下的定位参考信号；
一个或多个定位参考信号资源；
一个或多个定位参考信号资源集合；
一个或多个TRP下的定位参考信号；
一个或多个频率层下的定位参考信号；
全部频率层下的定位参考信号。
可选的，所述第三指示信息中还包括以下至少之一：
服务小区的RRM测量结果；
邻小区的RRM测量结果；
服务小区的定位参考信号的测量结果；
邻小区的定位参考信号的测量结果。
可选的，所述测量结果包含以下至少之一：参考信号标识，高于门限的N个最好的波束的测量结果，高于门限的N个最好的波束的指示，最佳波束的测量结果，最佳波束指示，首达径RSRP最强的N个波束测量结果，首达径RSRP最强的N个波束指示，N由协议约定、网络侧设备指示或者所述终端选择。
可选的，发送第三指示信息包括：
所述终端在满足以下条件至少之一时，发送第三指示信息：
若所述终端检测到跟踪区的调整超过第一跟踪区阈值，且所述终端未进入连接态，发送所述第三指示信息；
若所述终端检测到前后两次第一测量值之差超过第一测量阈值，且所述终端未进入连接态，发送所述第三指示信息，所述第一测量值包括以下至少之一：SSB的测量信息，寻呼或Msg2或Msg4或MsgB的测量信息，所述定位参考信号的测量信息；
若所述终端检测到第二定时器超时，且所述终端未进入连接态，发送所述第三指示信息；
若所述终端的驻留小区切换，发送所述第三指示信息；
若所述终端的驻留小区切换，且所述下行定位参考信号无法接收、所述位置相关信息无法上报或者所述上行定位参考信号无法发送，发送所述第三指示信息；
若所述终端移出预配置的所述定位参考信号的配置信息生效区域，发送所述第三指示信息。
可选的，所述预配置的所述定位参考信号的配置信息生效区域为某个小区，某个小区列表，或者，某个或某些SSB覆盖的区域。
可选的，所述定位装置80还包括：
第三接收模块，用于在空闲态或非激活态接收第一指示信息，所述第一 指示信息包括以下至少之一：
定位参考信号的可用性信息或者所述定位参考信号的配置信息的可用性信息；
定位参考信号的配置信息的更新信息；
其中，所述定位参考信号包括以下至少之一：所述上行定位参考信号和所述下行定位参考信号。
可选的，所述定位装置80还包括：
第四接收模块，用于发送第三指示信息之后，启动第三定时器，在所述第三定时器超时之前，接收所述第一指示信息。
可选的，上报位置相关信息包括：
上报测量信息，所述测量信息包括以下至少之一：
服务小区的RRM测量结果；
邻小区的RRM测量结果；
服务小区的定位参考信号的测量结果；
邻小区的定位参考信号的测量结果。
可选的，通过SDT方式上报所述测量信息。
可选的，周期性上报所述测量信息。
可选的，所述定位装置80还包括：
第五接收模块，用于接收所述测量信息的上报配置，所述上报配置包括以下至少之一：
上报周期；
周期偏移；
周期数；
上报的测量结果的内容；
执行RRM测量关联的小区标识。
可选的，接收所述测量信息的上报配置包括以下至少之一：
在广播消息中获得所述测量信息的上报配置；
在RRC专用消息中获得所述测量信息的上报配置；
在RRC释放消息中获得所述测量信息的上报配置。
可选的，所述上行定位参考信号包括：非周期SRS或者半持续SRS。
可选的，发送非周期SRS包括以下至少之一：
所述非周期SRS由C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH触发发送；
在由C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH和/或非周期SRS在竞争解决成功之后，RRC释放消息之前发送。
可选的，发送半持续SRS包括以下至少之一：
所述半持续SRS由网络侧设备调度的PDSCH激活发送；
在所述网络侧设备调度的PDSCH和/或所述半持续SRS在竞争解决成功之后，RRC释放消息之前接收。
可选的，所述定位装置80还包括：
第四发送模块，用于通过SDT方式发送请求信息，所述请求信息用于请求网络侧设备触发非周期SRS或者激活半持续SRS，所述请求信息包含以下至少之一：
非周期SRS触发请求或者半持续SRS激活请求；
上行定位请求；
事件信息。
可选的，通过SDT方式发送请求信息包括：
当事件发生时，通过SDT方式发送请求信息，所述事件包括以下至少之一：区域事件，动作事件。
可选的，所述定位装置80还包括：
第五发送模块，用于发送第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示上行定位参考信号定时变化。
可选的，发送第四指示信息包括以下之一：
通过SDT方式发送所述第四指示信息；
进入连接态发送所述第四指示信息。
可选的，所述第四指示信息中还包括：
上行定位参考信号定时变化的量；
导致上行定位参考信号定时变化的原因，所述原因包括以下至少之一：所述终端的驻留小区切换或小区重选，所述终端自动调整上行定位参考信号定时，所述终端接收到驻留小区的定时提前命令。
可选的，发送第四指示信息包括：在满足以下条件中的至少之一时，发送所述第四指示信息：所述终端的驻留小区切换或小区重选，所述终端自动调整上行定位参考信号定时，所述终端接收到驻留小区的定时提前Timing advance命令。
可选的，所述定位装置80还包括：第六发送模块，用于发送第五指示信息，所述第五指示信息用于指示驻留小区变化。
可选的，发送第五指示信息包括以下之一：
通过SDT方式发送所述第五指示信息；
进入连接态发送所述第五指示信息。
可选的，所述第五指示信息中还包括驻留小区的标识信息。
可选的，发送第五指示信息包括：
若所述终端的驻留小区切换，发送所述第五指示信息。
可选的，所述定位装置80还包括：
第二发起模块，用于若所述终端的驻留小区切换，且所述终端无法执行以下操作中的至少之一，所述终端发起随机接入进入连接态或者发送第三指示信息：
所述终端无法发送上行定位参考信号；
所述终端无法测量下行定位参考信号；
所述终端无法上报位置相关信息；
其中，所述第三指示信息用于指示定位参考信号的配置信息需要更新，所述定位参考信号包括上行定位参考信号和下行定位参考信号中的至少之一。
可选的，在空闲态或非激活态执行定位操作还包括以下至少之一：
若待发送的上行定位参考信号的时域位置距离寻呼时机超过距离X，所述终端忽略所述待发送的上行定位参考信号；
若下行定位参考信号的时域位置距离寻呼时机超过距离X，所述终端忽略所述下行定位参考信号的测量；
若位置相关信息上报的时域位置距离寻呼时机超过距离X，所述终端忽略所述位置相关信息的上报；
若待发送的上行定位参考信号的时域位置距离所述下行定位参考信号的时域位置超过距离X，所述终端忽略所述待发送的上行定位参考信号。
可选的，所述寻呼时机为驻留小区的寻呼时机。
可选的，上报位置相关信息包括：上报定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。
可选的，在下行和上行定位方法中，所述上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系包含在定位测量结果中。
可选的，所述接收并测量下行定位参考信号包括：根据下行定位参考信号与同步信号块SSB的空间波束关系，接收并测量下行定位参考信号；
其中，下行定位参考信号与同步信号块SSB的空间波束关系，由网络侧设备指示的下行定位参考信号与SSB的空间QCL关系获得；或者，根据下行定位参考信号资源与下行定位参考信号资源所在TRP下同步信号块突发中实际发送的SSB默认关系获得。
本申请实施例中的定位装置可以是装置，具有操作系统的装置或电子设备，也可以是终端中的部件、集成电路、或芯片。该装置或电子设备可以是移动终端，也可以为非移动终端。示例性的，移动终端可以包括但不限于上述所列举的终端11的类型，非移动终端可以为服务器、网络附属存储器(Network Attached Storage，NAS)、个人计算机(Personal Computer，PC)、电视机(Television，TV)、柜员机或者自助机等，本申请实施例不作具体限定。
本申请实施例提供的定位装置能够实现图6的方法实施例实现的各个过 程，并达到相同的技术效果，为避免重复，这里不再赘述。
请参考图9，本申请实施例还提供一种定位装置90，包括：
定位模块91，用于执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括以下至少之一：
向空闲态或非激活态的终端发送下行定位参考信号；
接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的位置相关信息；
测量空闲态或非激活态的终端发送的上行定位参考信号。
可选的，所述定位装置90还包括：
第一发送模块，用于向空闲态或非激活态的终端发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息包括以下至少之一：
定位参考信号的可用性信息或者所述定位参考信号的配置信息的可用性信息；
定位参考信号的配置信息的更新信息；
其中，所述定位参考信号包括以下至少之一：所述上行定位参考信号和所述下行定位参考信号。
可选的，所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新信息包括以下至少之一：
所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息；
更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
可选的，用于指示所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息或更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息包括以下至少之一：
所述定位参考信号的配置信息的开启或关闭；
所述定位参考信号的带宽的增加或减少；
所述定位参考信号的周期的增加或减少；
所述定位参考信号的静默配置的变化；
所述定位参考信号的空间关系配置变化；
所述定位参考信号的路损配置变化。
可选的，所述第一指示信息指示的定位参考信号为以下粒度之一：
一组或多组所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号；
一个或多个定位参考信号资源；
一个或多个定位参考信号资源集合；
一个或多个TRP下的定位参考信号；
一个或多个频率层下的定位参考信号；
全部频率层下的定位参考信号。
可选的，第一指示信息通过以下方式中的至少之一携带：
在寻呼PDCCH中携带；
在寻呼PDCCH调度的寻呼PDSCH中携带；
在寻呼提前指示中携带；
在随机接入过程或小数据传输过程中携带；
在广播消息中携带；
在RRC释放消息中携带；
在网络侧设备配置的下行监听机会和/或监听窗口对应的PDCCH和/或PDSCH中携带；
在从网络侧设备配置的下行调度资源PDSCH中携带。
可选的，所述第一指示信息由寻呼PDCCH中的短消息的比特位表示，或者，由寻呼PDCCH中的保留比特位表示。
可选的，所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息在寻呼PDCCH中携带，更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息在寻呼PDCCH调度的寻呼PDSCH中携带。
可选的，所述第一指示信息还包括是否进入连接态并更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
可选的，所述定位装置90还包括：
第一接收模块，用于接收所述终端发送的第一反馈信息，所述第一反馈信息用于指示已收到所述第一指示信息。
可选的，所述第一反馈信息包括以下至少之一：
反馈理由，所述反馈理由包括以下至少之一：所述定位参考信号的可用性指示反馈，所述定位参考信号的配置信息更新反馈，网络侧设备发起的所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新反馈；
所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新响应，所述更新响应用于响应所述第一指示信息中的所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息。
可选的，所述定位装置90还包括：
第二发送模块，用于向所述终端发送更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
可选的，所述更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息通过以下方式之一携带：
在RRC释放消息中携带；
在C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH调度的PDSCH中携带；
在RRC专用消息中携带。
可选的，所述位置相关信息包括：第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示后续数据传输的信息，所述后续数据传输的信息包括以下至少之一：
后续是否有数据传输；
后续数据传输的大小；
后续数据传输的周期；
后续数据传输是否需要ACK反馈；
后续待传输数据的业务特性；
后续待传输数据的类型，所述类型包含以下至少之一：定位相关数据或非定位相关数据，控制面数据或者用户面数据，信令无线承载、非接入层或者数据无线承载数据。
可选的，所述定位装置90还包括：
第二接收模块，用于在网络侧设备配置的PDCCH调度的PUSCH上接收后续待传输数据。
可选的，所述定位装置90还包括：
第三接收模块，用于接收所述终端发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示定位参考信号的配置信息需要更新，所述定位参考信号包括上行定位参考信号和下行定位参考信号中的至少之一。
可选的，所述第三指示信息还包括：发送所述第三指示信息的理由，所述理由包括以下至少之一：所述终端发起的所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新，所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新，所述定位参考信号的配置信息不可用。
可选的，所述第三指示信息指示的定位参考信号为以下粒度之一：
一组或多组所述定位参考信号的配置信息下的定位参考信号；
一个或多个定位参考信号资源；
一个或多个定位参考信号资源集合；
一个或多个TRP下的定位参考信号；
一个或多个频率层下的定位参考信号；
全部频率层下的定位参考信号。
可选的，所述第三指示信息中还包括以下至少之一：
服务小区的RRM测量结果；
邻小区的RRM测量结果；
服务小区的定位参考信号的测量结果；
邻小区的定位参考信号的测量结果。
可选的，所述测量结果包含以下至少之一：参考信号标识，高于门限的N个最好的波束的测量结果，高于门限的N个最好的波束的指示，最佳波束的测量结果，最佳波束指示，首达径RSRP最强的N个波束测量结果，首达径RSRP最强的N个波束指示，N由协议约定、网络侧设备指示或者所述终端选择。
可选的，所述定位装置90还包括：
第三发送模块，用于向所述终端发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息包括以下至少之一：
定位参考信号的可用性信息或者所述定位参考信号的配置信息的可用性信息；
定位参考信号的配置信息的更新信息；
其中，所述定位参考信号包括以下至少之一：所述上行定位参考信号和所述下行定位参考信号。
可选的，所述位置相关信息包括：测量信息，所述测量信息包括以下至少之一：
服务小区的RRM测量结果；
邻小区的RRM测量结果；
服务小区的定位参考信号的测量结果；
邻小区的定位参考信号的测量结果。
可选的，所述测量信息由所述终端周期性上报。
可选的，所述定位装置还包括：
第四发送模块，用于向所述终端发送所述测量信息的上报配置，所述上报配置包括以下至少之一：
上报周期；
周期偏移；
周期数；
上报的测量结果的内容；
执行RRM测量关联的小区标识。
可选的，所述测量信息的上报配置通过以下方式中的至少之一携带：
在广播消息中携带；
在RRC专用消息中携带；
在RRC释放消息中携带。
可选的，所述上行定位参考信号包括：非周期SRS或者半持续SRS。
可选的，所述定位装置还包括：
第五发送模块，用于通过由C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH向终端发送触发信息， 以触发所述终端发送非周期SRS；
其中，在由C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH和/或非周期SRS在竞争解决成功之后，RRC释放消息之前发送。
可选的，所述定位装置90还包括：
第六发送模块，用于通过由网络侧设备调度的PDSCH发送激活信息，以激活所述终端发送半持续SRS；
其中，在所述网络侧设备调度的PDSCH和/或所述半持续SRS在竞争解决成功之后，RRC释放消息之前接收。
可选的，所述定位装置90还包括：
第三接收模块，用于接收所述终端通过SDT方式发送的请求信息，所述请求信息用于请求网络侧设备触发非周期SRS或者激活半持续SRS，所述请求信息包含以下至少之一：
非周期SRS触发请求或者半持续SRS激活请求；
上行定位请求；
事件信息。
可选的，所述定位装置90还包括：
第四接收模块，用于接收所述终端发送第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示上行定位参考信号定时变化。
可选的，所述第四指示信息中还包括：
上行定位参考信号定时变化的量；
导致上行定位参考信号定时变化的原因，所述原因包括以下至少之一：所述终端的驻留小区切换或小区重选，所述终端自动调整上行定位参考信号定时，所述终端接收到驻留小区的定时提前命令。
可选的，所述定位装置90还包括：
第五接收模块，用于接收所述终端发送的第五指示信息，所述第五指示信息用于指示驻留小区变化。
可选的，所述第五指示信息中还包括驻留小区的标识信息。
可选的，接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的位置相关信息包括：
接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。
本申请实施例还提供一种定位装置，包括：
定位模块，用于在空闲态、非激活态或连接态执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括：
上报位置相关信息，所述位置相关信息包括定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。
其中，所述关联关系用于辅助网络侧设备进行定位计算，进而减少或消除时间误差组对定位精度的影响，提高定位精度。
可选的，在下行和上行定位方法中，所述上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系包含在定位测量结果中。
本申请实施例还提供一种定位装置，包括：
定位模块，用于执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括：
接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的位置相关信息，所述位置相关信息包括定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。
其中，所述关联关系用于辅助网络侧设备进行定位计算，进而减少或消除时间误差组对定位精度的影响，提高定位精度。
可选的，在下行和上行定位方法中，所述上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系包含在定位测量结果中。
如图10所示，本申请实施例还提供一种通信设备100，包括处理器101，存储器102，存储在存储器102上并可在所述处理器101上运行的程序或指令，例如，该通信设备100为终端时，该程序或指令被处理器101执行时实现上述由终端执行的定位方法实施例的各个过程，且能达到相同的技术效果。该通信设备100为网络侧设备时，该程序或指令被处理器101执行时实现上述由网络侧设备执行的定位方法实施例的各个过程，且能达到相同的技术效 果，为避免重复，这里不再赘述。
本申请实施例还提供一种终端，包括处理器和通信接口，处理器用于终端在空闲态或非激活态执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括以下至少之一：接收并测量下行定位参考信号；上报位置相关信息；发送上行定位参考信号。该终端实施例是与上述终端侧方法实施例对应的，上述方法实施例的各个实施过程和实现方式均可适用于该终端实施例中，且能达到相同的技术效果。具体地，图11为实现本申请实施例的一种终端的硬件结构示意图。
该终端110包括但不限于：射频单元111、网络模块112、音频输出单元113、输入单元114、传感器115、显示单元116、用户输入单元117、接口单元118、存储器119、以及处理器1110等中的至少部分部件。
本领域技术人员可以理解，终端110还可以包括给各个部件供电的电源(比如电池)，电源可以通过电源管理系统与处理器1110逻辑相连，从而通过电源管理系统实现管理充电、放电、以及功耗管理等功能。图11中示出的终端结构并不构成对终端的限定，终端可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者不同的部件布置，在此不再赘述。
应理解的是，本申请实施例中，输入单元114可以包括图形处理器(Graphics Processing Unit，GPU)1141和麦克风1142，图形处理器1141对在视频捕获模式或图像捕获模式中由图像捕获装置(如摄像头)获得的静态图片或视频的图像数据进行处理。显示单元116可包括显示面板1161，可以采用液晶显示器、有机发光二极管等形式来配置显示面板1161。用户输入单元117包括触控面板1171以及其他输入设备1172。触控面板1171，也称为触摸屏。触控面板1171可包括触摸检测装置和触摸控制器两个部分。其他输入设备1172可以包括但不限于物理键盘、功能键(比如音量控制按键、开关按键等)、轨迹球、鼠标、操作杆，在此不再赘述。
本申请实施例中，射频单元111将来自网络侧设备的下行数据接收后，给处理器1110处理；另外，将上行的数据发送给网络侧设备。通常，射频单元111包括但不限于天线、至少一个放大器、收发信机、耦合器、低噪声放 大器、双工器等。
存储器119可用于存储软件程序或指令以及各种数据。存储器119可主要包括存储程序或指令区和存储数据区，其中，存储程序或指令区可存储操作系统、至少一个功能所需的应用程序或指令(比如声音播放功能、图像播放功能等)等。此外，存储器119可以包括高速随机存取存储器，还可以包括非易失性存储器，其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(Read-Only Memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。例如至少一个磁盘存储器件、闪存器件、或其他非易失性固态存储器件。
处理器1110可包括一个或多个处理单元；可选的，处理器1110可集成应用处理器和调制解调处理器，其中，应用处理器主要处理操作系统、用户界面和应用程序或指令等，调制解调处理器主要处理无线通信，如基带处理器。可以理解的是，上述调制解调处理器也可以不集成到处理器1110中。
其中，在一些实施例中，处理器1110，用于终端在空闲态或非激活态执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括以下至少之一：
接收并测量下行定位参考信号；
上报位置相关信息；
发送上行定位参考信号。
在本申请实施例中，在RRC非激活态或RRC空闲态下执行定位功能，保障定位性能和低功耗。
可选的，所述射频模块111，用于在空闲态或非激活态接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息包括以下至少之一：
定位参考信号的可用性信息或者所述定位参考信号的配置信息的可用性信息；
定位参考信号的配置信息的更新信息；
其中，所述定位参考信号包括以下至少之一：所述上行定位参考信号和 所述下行定位参考信号。
可选的，所述射频模块111，用于若所述第一指示信息指示所述定位参考信号不可用，所述终端假设所述定位参考信号不存在，或所述定位参考信号未被发送，或所述定位参考信号被停止发送，或不发送所述定位参考信号，或停止发送所述定位参考信号；
或者
若所述第一指示信息指示所述定位参考信号的配置信息不可用，所述终端假设所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号不存在，或所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号未被发送，或定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号被停止发送，或不发送所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号，或停止发送所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号。
可选的，所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新信息包括以下至少之一：
所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息；
更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
可选的，用于指示所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息或更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息包括以下至少之一：
所述定位参考信号的配置信息的开启或关闭；
所述定位参考信号的带宽的增加或减少；
所述定位参考信号的周期的增加或减少；
所述定位参考信号的静默配置的变化；
所述定位参考信号的空间关系配置变化；
所述定位参考信号的路损配置变化。
可选的，所述第一指示信息指示的定位参考信号为以下粒度之一：
一组或多组所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号；
一个或多个定位参考信号资源；
一个或多个定位参考信号资源集合；
一个或多个TRP下的定位参考信号；
一个或多个频率层下的定位参考信号；
全部频率层下的定位参考信号。
可选的，在空闲态或非激活态接收第一指示信息包括以下至少之一：
在寻呼PDCCH中获得所述第一指示信息；
在寻呼PDCCH调度的寻呼PDSCH中获得所述第一指示信息；
在寻呼提前指示中获得所述第一指示信息；
在随机接入过程或小数据传输过程中获得所述第一指示信息；
在广播消息中获得所述第一指示信息；
在RRC释放消息中获得所述第一指示信息；
根据网络侧设备配置的下行监听机会和/或监听窗口，在PDCCH和/或PDSCH中获得所述第一指示信息；
从网络侧设备配置的下行调度资源PDSCH中获得所述第一指示信息。
可选的，所述第一指示信息由寻呼PDCCH中的短消息的比特位表示，或者，由寻呼PDCCH中的保留比特位表示。
可选的，在寻呼PDCCH中获得所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息，在寻呼PDCCH调度的寻呼PDSCH中获得更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
可选的，所述第一指示信息还包括是否进入连接态并更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
可选的，所述射频模块111，用于若所述第一指示信息包括进入连接态并更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息的指示信息，或者，所述第一指示信息不包括不进入连接态以更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息的指示信息，发起随机接入进入连接态并更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
可选的，所述射频模块111，用于发送第一反馈信息，所述第一反馈信息用于指示已收到所述第一指示信息。
可选的，所述第一反馈信息在空闲态或非激活态发送或者所述终端进入 连接态之后发送。
可选的，所述第一反馈信息包括以下至少之一：
反馈理由，所述反馈理由包括以下至少之一：所述定位参考信号的可用性指示反馈，所述定位参考信号的配置信息更新反馈，网络侧设备发起的所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新反馈；
所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新响应，所述更新响应用于响应所述第一指示信息中的所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息。
可选的，所述射频模块111，用于接收更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
可选的，接收更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息包括以下方式之一：
在RRC释放消息中获得更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息；
在C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH调度的PDSCH中获得更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息；
进入连接态之后接收更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
可选的，所述处理模块1110，用于若所述终端被配置了初始下行BWP，执行以下之一：
在所述初始下行BWP内接收所述下行定位参考信号；
在所述初始下行BWP内接收与所述初始下行BWP参数配置相同的下行定位参考信号；
若所述下行定位参考信号与第一信号在同一个符号重复或碰撞或传输，所述终端不接收所述下行定位参考信号，所述第一信号包括以下至少之一：SIB1，除所述SIB1之外的其他SIB，Msg2，MSg4，MsgB，调度SIB1的PDCCH，SSB；
所述终端在所述初始下行BWP外接收所述下行定位参考信号；
所述终端根据网络侧设备指示，协议约定或所述终端的选择，执行BWP切换，在切换后的BWP上接收所述下行定位参考信号。
可选的，所述位置相关信息包括：第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用 于指示后续数据传输的信息，所述后续数据传输的信息包括以下至少之一：
后续是否有数据传输；
后续数据传输的大小；
后续数据传输的周期；
后续数据传输是否需要ACK反馈；
后续待传输数据的业务特性；
后续待传输数据的类型，所述类型包含以下至少之一：定位相关数据或非定位相关数据，控制面数据或者用户面数据，信令无线承载、非接入层或者数据无线承载数据。
可选的，所述射频模块111，用于在网络侧设备配置的PDCCH调度的PUSCH上传输后续待传输数据。
可选的，所述网络侧设备配置的PDCCH中携带调度的上行数据的类型指示；在网络侧设备配置的PDCCH调度的PUSCH上传输后续待传输数据包括：
在网络侧设备配置的PDCCH调度的PUSCH上传输所述类型指示所指示的类型对应的后续待传输数据。
可选的，所述射频模块111，用于发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示定位参考信号的配置信息需要更新，所述定位参考信号包括上行定位参考信号和下行定位参考信号中的至少之一。
可选的，所述第三指示信息通过SDT方式发送或者所述终端进入连接态之后发送。
可选的，所述第三指示信息还包括：发送所述第三指示信息的理由，所述理由包括以下至少之一：所述终端发起的所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新，所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新，所述定位参考信号的配置信息不可用。
可选的，所述第三指示信息指示的定位参考信号为以下粒度之一：
一组或多组所述定位参考信号的配置信息下的定位参考信号；
一个或多个定位参考信号资源；
一个或多个定位参考信号资源集合；
一个或多个TRP下的定位参考信号；
一个或多个频率层下的定位参考信号；
全部频率层下的定位参考信号。
可选的，所述第三指示信息中还包括以下至少之一：
服务小区的RRM测量结果；
邻小区的RRM测量结果；
服务小区的定位参考信号的测量结果；
邻小区的定位参考信号的测量结果。
可选的，所述测量结果包含以下至少之一：参考信号标识，高于门限的N个最好的波束的测量结果，高于门限的N个最好的波束的指示，最佳波束的测量结果，最佳波束指示，首达径RSRP最强的N个波束测量结果，首达径RSRP最强的N个波束指示，N由协议约定、网络侧设备指示或者所述终端选择。
可选的，所述射频模块111，用于所述终端在满足以下条件至少之一时，发送第三指示信息：
若所述终端检测到跟踪区的调整超过第一跟踪区阈值，且所述终端未进入连接态，发送所述第三指示信息；
若所述终端检测到前后两次第一测量值之差超过第一测量阈值，且所述终端未进入连接态，发送所述第三指示信息，所述第一测量值包括以下至少之一：SSB的测量信息，寻呼或Msg2或Msg4或MsgB的测量信息，所述定位参考信号的测量信息；
若所述终端检测到第二定时器超时，且所述终端未进入连接态，发送所述第三指示信息；
若所述终端的驻留小区切换，发送所述第三指示信息；
若所述终端的驻留小区切换，且所述下行定位参考信号无法接收、所述 位置相关信息无法上报或者所述上行定位参考信号无法发送，发送所述第三指示信息；
若所述终端移出预配置的所述定位参考信号的配置信息生效区域，发送所述第三指示信息。
可选的，所述预配置的所述定位参考信号的配置信息生效区域为某个小区，某个小区列表，或者，某个或某些SSB覆盖的区域。
可选的，所述射频模块111，用于在空闲态或非激活态接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息包括以下至少之一：
定位参考信号的可用性信息或者所述定位参考信号的配置信息的可用性信息；
定位参考信号的配置信息的更新信息；
其中，所述定位参考信号包括以下至少之一：所述上行定位参考信号和所述下行定位参考信号。
可选的，所述射频模块111，用于发送第三指示信息之后，启动第三定时器，在所述第三定时器超时之前，接收所述第一指示信息。
可选的，上报位置相关信息包括：
上报测量信息，所述测量信息包括以下至少之一：
服务小区的RRM测量结果；
邻小区的RRM测量结果；
服务小区的定位参考信号的测量结果；
邻小区的定位参考信号的测量结果。
可选的，通过SDT方式上报所述测量信息。
可选的，周期性上报所述测量信息。
可选的，所述射频模块111，用于接收所述测量信息的上报配置，所述上报配置包括以下至少之一：
上报周期；
周期偏移；
周期数；
上报的测量结果的内容；
执行RRM测量关联的小区标识。
可选的，接收所述测量信息的上报配置包括以下至少之一：
在广播消息中获得所述测量信息的上报配置；
在RRC专用消息中获得所述测量信息的上报配置；
在RRC释放消息中获得所述测量信息的上报配置。
可选的，所述上行定位参考信号包括：非周期SRS或者半持续SRS。
可选的，发送非周期SRS包括以下至少之一：
所述非周期SRS由C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH触发发送；
在由C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH和/或非周期SRS在竞争解决成功之后，RRC释放消息之前发送。
可选的，发送半持续SRS包括以下至少之一：
所述半持续SRS由网络侧设备调度的PDSCH激活发送；
在所述网络侧设备调度的PDSCH和/或所述半持续SRS在竞争解决成功之后，RRC释放消息之前接收。
可选的，所述射频模块111，用于通过SDT方式发送请求信息，所述请求信息用于请求网络侧设备触发非周期SRS或者激活半持续SRS，所述请求信息包含以下至少之一：
非周期SRS触发请求或者半持续SRS激活请求；
上行定位请求；
事件信息。
可选的，通过SDT方式发送请求信息包括：
当事件发生时，通过SDT方式发送请求信息，所述事件包括以下至少之一：区域事件，动作事件。
可选的，所述射频模块111，用于发送第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示上行定位参考信号定时变化。
可选的，发送第四指示信息包括以下之一：
通过SDT方式发送所述第四指示信息；
进入连接态发送所述第四指示信息。
可选的，所述第四指示信息中还包括：
上行定位参考信号定时变化的量；
导致上行定位参考信号定时变化的原因，所述原因包括以下至少之一：所述终端的驻留小区切换或小区重选，所述终端自动调整上行定位参考信号定时，所述终端接收到驻留小区的定时提前命令。
可选的，发送第四指示信息包括：
在满足以下条件中的至少之一时，发送所述第四指示信息：所述终端的驻留小区切换或小区重选，所述终端自动调整上行定位参考信号定时，所述终端接收到驻留小区的定时提前Timing advance命令。
可选的，所述射频模块111，用于发送第五指示信息，所述第五指示信息用于指示驻留小区变化。
可选的，发送第五指示信息包括以下之一：
通过SDT方式发送所述第五指示信息；
进入连接态发送所述第五指示信息。
可选的，所述第五指示信息中还包括驻留小区的标识信息。
可选的，发送第五指示信息包括：若所述终端的驻留小区切换，发送所述第五指示信息。
可选的，所述射频模块111，用于若所述终端的驻留小区切换，且所述终端无法执行以下操作中的至少之一，所述终端发起随机接入进入连接态或者发送第三指示信息：
所述终端无法发送上行定位参考信号；
所述终端无法测量下行定位参考信号；
所述终端无法上报位置相关信息；
其中，所述第三指示信息用于指示定位参考信号的配置信息需要更新， 所述定位参考信号包括上行定位参考信号和下行定位参考信号中的至少之一。
可选的，在空闲态或非激活态执行定位操作还包括以下至少之一：
若待发送的上行定位参考信号的时域位置距离寻呼时机超过距离X，所述终端忽略所述待发送的上行定位参考信号；
若下行定位参考信号的时域位置距离寻呼时机超过距离X，所述终端忽略所述下行定位参考信号的测量；
若位置相关信息上报的时域位置距离寻呼时机超过距离X，所述终端忽略所述位置相关信息的上报；
若待发送的上行定位参考信号的时域位置距离所述下行定位参考信号的时域位置超过距离X，所述终端忽略所述待发送的上行定位参考信号。
可选的，所述寻呼时机为驻留小区的寻呼时机。
可选的，上报位置相关信息包括：上报定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。
可选的，在下行和上行定位方法中，所述上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系包含在定位测量结果中。
可选的，所述接收并测量下行定位参考信号包括：根据下行定位参考信号与同步信号块SSB的空间波束关系，接收并测量下行定位参考信号；
其中，下行定位参考信号与同步信号块SSB的空间波束关系，由网络侧设备指示的下行定位参考信号与SSB的空间QCL关系获得；或者，根据下行定位参考信号资源与下行定位参考信号资源所在TRP下同步信号块突发中实际发送的SSB默认关系获得。
其中，在另外一些实施例中，处理器1110，用于在空闲态、非激活态或连接态执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括：
上报位置相关信息，所述位置相关信息包括定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。
其中，所述关联关系用于辅助网络侧设备进行定位计算，进而减少或消除时间误差组对定位精度的影响，提高定位精度。
可选的，在下行和上行定位方法中，所述上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系包含在定位测量结果中。
本申请实施例还提供一种网络侧设备，包括处理器和通信接口，处理器用于网络侧设备执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括以下至少之一：向空闲态或非激活态的终端发送下行定位参考信号；接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的位置相关信息；测量空闲态或非激活态的终端发送的上行定位参考信号。该网络侧设备实施例是与上述网络侧设备方法实施例对应的，上述方法实施例的各个实施过程和实现方式均可适用于该网络侧设备实施例中，且能达到相同的技术效果。
本申请实施例还提供一种网络侧设备，包括处理器和通信接口，处理器用于执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括：接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的位置相关信息，所述位置相关信息包括定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。该网络侧设备实施例是与上述网络侧设备方法实施例对应的，上述方法实施例的各个实施过程和实现方式均可适用于该网络侧设备实施例中，且能达到相同的技术效果。
具体地，本申请实施例还提供了一种网络侧设备。如图12所示，该网络设备1200包括：天线121、射频装置122、基带装置123。天线121与射频装置122连接。在上行方向上，射频装置122通过天线121接收信息，将接收的信息发送给基带装置123进行处理。在下行方向上，基带装置123对要发送的信息进行处理，并发送给射频装置122，射频装置122对收到的信息进行处理后经过天线121发送出去。
上述频带处理装置可以位于基带装置123中，以上实施例中网络侧设备执行的方法可以在基带装置123中实现，该基带装置123包括处理器124和存储器125。
基带装置123例如可以包括至少一个基带板，该基带板上设置有多个芯片，如图12所示，其中一个芯片例如为处理器124，与存储器125连接，以 调用存储器125中的程序，执行以上方法实施例中所示的网络设备操作。
该基带装置123还可以包括网络接口126，用于与射频装置122交互信息，该接口例如为通用公共无线接口(Common Public Radio Interface，CPRI)。
具体地，本申请实施例的网络侧设备还包括：存储在存储器125上并可在处理器124上运行的指令或程序，处理器124调用存储器125中的指令或程序执行图9所示各模块执行的方法，并达到相同的技术效果，为避免重复，故不在此赘述。
本申请实施例还提供一种可读存储介质，所述可读存储介质上存储有程序或指令，该程序或指令被处理器执行时实现上述定位方法实施例的各个过程，且能达到相同的技术效果，为避免重复，这里不再赘述。
其中，所述处理器为上述实施例中所述的终端中的处理器。所述可读存储介质，包括计算机可读存储介质，如计算机只读存储器(Read-Only Memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等。
本申请实施例另提供了一种芯片，所述芯片包括处理器和通信接口，所述通信接口和所述处理器耦合，所述处理器用于运行程序或指令，实现上述定位方法实施例的各个过程，且能达到相同的技术效果，为避免重复，这里不再赘述。
应理解，本申请实施例提到的芯片还可以称为系统级芯片，系统芯片，芯片系统或片上系统芯片等。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品被存储在非瞬态的存储介质中，所述计算机程序产品被至少一个处理器执行以实现上述定位方法实施例的各个过程，且能达到相同的技术效果，为避免重复，这里不再赘述。
需要说明的是，在本文中，术语“包括”、“包含”或者其任何其他变体意在涵盖非排他性的包含，从而使得包括一系列要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置不仅包括那些要素，而且还包括没有明确列出的其他要素，或者是还包括为这种过程、方法、物品或者装置所固有的要素。在没有更多限制的情 况下，由语句“包括一个……”限定的要素，并不排除在包括该要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置中还存在另外的相同要素。此外，需要指出的是，本申请实施方式中的方法和装置的范围不限按示出或讨论的顺序来执行功能，还可包括根据所涉及的功能按基本同时的方式或按相反的顺序来执行功能，例如，可以按不同于所描述的次序来执行所描述的方法，并且还可以添加、省去、或组合各种步骤。另外，参照某些示例所描述的特征可在其他示例中被组合。
通过以上的实施方式的描述，本领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到上述实施例方法可借助软件加必需的通用硬件平台的方式来实现，当然也可以通过硬件，但很多情况下前者是更佳的实施方式。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分可以以计算机软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质(如ROM/RAM、磁碟、光盘)中，包括若干指令用以使得一台终端(可以是手机，计算机，服务器，空调器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述的方法。
在本申请所提供的实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单 元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对相关技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、ROM、RAM、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
上面结合附图对本申请的实施例进行了描述，但是本申请并不局限于上述的具体实施方式，上述的具体实施方式仅仅是示意性的，而不是限制性的，本领域的普通技术人员在本申请的启示下，在不脱离本申请宗旨和权利要求所保护的范围情况下，还可做出很多形式，均属于本申请的保护之内。

Claims (73)

  1. 一种定位方法，包括：
    终端在空闲态或非激活态执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括以下至少之一：
    接收并测量下行定位参考信号；
    上报位置相关信息；
    发送上行定位参考信号。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，还包括：
    所述终端在空闲态或非激活态接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息包括以下至少之一：
    定位参考信号的可用性信息或者所述定位参考信号的配置信息的可用性信息；
    定位参考信号的配置信息的更新信息；
    其中，所述定位参考信号包括以下至少之一：所述上行定位参考信号和所述下行定位参考信号。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其中，所述终端在空闲态或非激活态接收第一指示信息之后还包括：
    若所述第一指示信息指示所述定位参考信号不可用，所述终端假设所述定位参考信号不存在，或所述定位参考信号未被发送，或所述定位参考信号被停止发送，或不发送所述定位参考信号，或停止发送所述定位参考信号；
    或者
    若所述第一指示信息指示所述定位参考信号的配置信息不可用，所述终端假设所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号不存在，或所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号未被发送，或所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号被停止发送，或不发送所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号，或停止发送所述定位参考信号的配置信息对 应的定位参考信号。
  4. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其中，所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新信息包括以下至少之一：
    所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息；
    更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法，其中，用于指示所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息或更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息包括以下至少之一：
    所述定位参考信号的配置信息的开启或关闭；
    所述定位参考信号的带宽的增加或减少；
    所述定位参考信号的周期的增加或减少；
    所述定位参考信号的静默配置的变化；
    所述定位参考信号的空间关系配置变化；
    所述定位参考信号的路损配置变化。
  6. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其中，所述第一指示信息指示的定位参考信号为以下粒度之一：
    一组或多组所述定位参考信号的配置信息对应的定位参考信号；
    一个或多个定位参考信号资源；
    一个或多个定位参考信号资源集合；
    一个或多个发送和接收点TRP下的定位参考信号；
    一个或多个频率层下的定位参考信号；
    全部频率层下的定位参考信号。
  7. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其中，所述终端在空闲态或非激活态接收第一指示信息包括以下至少之一：
    所述终端在寻呼物理下行控制信道PDCCH中获得所述第一指示信息；
    所述终端在寻呼PDCCH调度的寻呼物理下行共享信道PDSCH中获得所述第一指示信息；
    所述终端在寻呼提前指示中获得所述第一指示信息；
    所述终端在随机接入过程或小数据传输过程中获得所述第一指示信息；
    所述终端在广播消息中获得所述第一指示信息；
    所述终端在无线资源控制RRC释放消息中获得所述第一指示信息；
    所述终端根据网络侧设备配置的下行监听机会和/或监听窗口，在PDCCH和/或PDSCH中获得所述第一指示信息；
    所述终端从网络侧设备配置的下行调度资源PDSCH中获得所述第一指示信息。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法，其中，所述第一指示信息由寻呼PDCCH中的短消息的比特位表示，或者，由寻呼PDCCH中的保留比特位表示。
  9. 根据权利要求7所述的方法，其中，所述终端在寻呼PDCCH中获得所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息，在寻呼PDCCH调度的寻呼PDSCH中获得更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
  10. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其中，所述第一指示信息还包括是否进入连接态并更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法，其中，所述终端在空闲态或非激活态接收第一指示信息之后还包括：
    若所述第一指示信息包括进入连接态并更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息的指示信息，或者，所述第一指示信息不包括不进入连接态以更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息的指示信息，所述终端发起随机接入进入连接态并更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
  12. 根据权利要求2或10所述的方法，其中，所述终端在空闲态或非激活态接收第一指示信息之后还包括：
    所述终端发送第一反馈信息，所述第一反馈信息用于指示已收到所述第一指示信息。
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法，其中，所述第一反馈信息在空闲态或非激活态发送或者所述终端进入连接态之后发送。
  14. 根据权利要求12所述的方法，其中，所述第一反馈信息包括以下至少之一：
    反馈理由，所述反馈理由包括以下至少之一：所述定位参考信号的可用性指示反馈，所述定位参考信号的配置信息更新反馈，网络侧设备发起的所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新反馈；
    所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新响应，所述更新响应用于响应所述第一指示信息中的所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息。
  15. 根据权利要求12所述的方法，其中，所述终端发送第一反馈信息之后还包括：
    所述终端接收更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法，其中，所述终端接收更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息包括以下方式之一：
    所述终端在RRC释放消息中获得更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息；
    所述终端在小区无线网络临时标识C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH调度的PDSCH中获得更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息；
    所述终端进入连接态之后接收更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
  17. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，接收并测量下行定位参考信号包括：
    若所述终端被配置了初始下行带宽部分BWP，所述终端执行以下之一：
    在所述初始下行BWP内接收所述下行定位参考信号；
    在所述初始下行BWP内接收与所述初始下行BWP参数配置相同的下行定位参考信号；
    若所述下行定位参考信号与第一信号在同一个符号重复或碰撞或传输，所述终端不接收所述下行定位参考信号，所述第一信号包括以下至少之一：SIB1，除所述SIB1之外的其他SIB，Msg2，MSg4，MsgB，调度SIB1的PDCCH，同步信号块SSB；
    所述终端在所述初始下行BWP外接收所述下行定位参考信号；
    所述终端根据网络侧设备指示，协议约定或所述终端的选择，执行BWP切换，在切换后的BWP上接收所述下行定位参考信号。
  18. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，所述位置相关信息包括：第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示后续数据传输的信息，所述后续数据传输的信息包括以下至少之一：
    后续是否有数据传输；
    后续数据传输的大小；
    后续数据传输的周期；
    后续数据传输是否需要ACK反馈；
    后续待传输数据的业务特性；
    后续待传输数据的类型，所述类型包含以下至少之一：定位相关数据或非定位相关数据，控制面数据或者用户面数据，信令无线承载、非接入层或者数据无线承载数据。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法，其中，上报位置相关信息之后还包括：
    在网络侧设备配置的PDCCH调度的PUSCH上传输后续待传输数据。
  20. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，还包括：
    所述终端发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示定位参考信号的配置信息需要更新，所述定位参考信号包括上行定位参考信号和下行定位参考信号中的至少之一。
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法，其中，所述第三指示信息通过小数据传输SDT方式发送或者所述终端进入连接态之后发送。
  22. 根据权利要求20所述的方法，其中，所述第三指示信息还包括：发送所述第三指示信息的理由，所述理由包括以下至少之一：
    所述终端发起的所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新；
    所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新；
    所述定位参考信号的配置信息不可用。
  23. 根据权利要求20所述的方法，其中，所述第三指示信息中还包括以 下至少之一：
    服务小区的RRM测量结果；
    邻小区的RRM测量结果；
    服务小区的定位参考信号的测量结果；
    邻小区的定位参考信号的测量结果。
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的方法，其中，所述测量结果包含以下至少之一：参考信号标识，高于门限的N个最好的波束的测量结果，高于门限的N个最好的波束的指示，最佳波束的测量结果，最佳波束指示，首达径RSRP最强的N个波束测量结果，首达径RSRP最强的N个波束指示，N由协议约定、网络侧设备指示或者所述终端选择。
  25. 根据权利要求20所述的方法，其中，所述终端发送第三指示信息包括：
    所述终端在满足以下条件至少之一时，发送第三指示信息：
    若所述终端检测到跟踪区的调整超过第一跟踪区阈值，且所述终端未进入连接态，发送所述第三指示信息；
    若所述终端检测到前后两次第一测量值之差超过第一测量阈值，且所述终端未进入连接态，发送所述第三指示信息，所述第一测量值包括以下至少之一：SSB的测量信息，寻呼或Msg2或Msg4或MsgB的测量信息，所述定位参考信号的测量信息；
    若所述终端检测到第二定时器超时，且所述终端未进入连接态，发送所述第三指示信息；
    若所述终端的驻留小区切换，发送所述第三指示信息；
    若所述终端的驻留小区切换，且所述下行定位参考信号无法接收、所述位置相关信息无法上报或者所述上行定位参考信号无法发送，发送所述第三指示信息；
    若所述终端移出预配置的所述定位参考信号的配置信息生效区域，发送所述第三指示信息。
  26. 根据权利要求20所述的方法，其中，所述终端发送第三指示信息之后还包括：
    所述终端在空闲态或非激活态接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息包括以下至少之一：
    定位参考信号的可用性信息或者所述定位参考信号的配置信息的可用性信息；
    定位参考信号的配置信息的更新信息；
    其中，所述定位参考信号包括以下至少之一：所述上行定位参考信号和所述下行定位参考信号。
  27. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，上报位置相关信息包括：上报测量信息，所述测量信息包括以下至少之一：
    服务小区的RRM测量结果；
    邻小区的RRM测量结果；
    服务小区的定位参考信号的测量结果；
    邻小区的定位参考信号的测量结果。
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的方法，其中，通过SDT方式上报所述测量信息。
  29. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，发送上行定位参考信号包括：
    发送非周期SRS或者半持续SRS。
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的方法，其中，发送非周期SRS包括以下至少之一：
    所述非周期SRS由C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH触发发送；
    在由C-RNTI加扰的PDCCH和/或非周期SRS在竞争解决成功之后，RRC释放消息之前发送。
  31. 根据权利要求29所述的方法，其中，发送上行定位参考信号之前还包括：
    所述终端通过SDT方式发送请求信息，所述请求信息用于请求网络侧设 备触发非周期SRS或者激活半持续SRS，所述请求信息包含以下至少之一：
    非周期SRS触发请求或者半持续SRS激活请求；
    上行定位请求；
    事件信息。
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的方法，其中，通过SDT方式发送请求信息包括：
    当事件发生时，通过SDT方式发送请求信息，所述事件包括以下至少之一：区域事件，动作事件。
  33. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，还包括：
    所述终端发送第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示上行定位参考信号定时变化。
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的方法，其中，所述第四指示信息中还包括：
    上行定位参考信号定时变化的量；
    导致上行定位参考信号定时变化的原因，所述原因包括以下至少之一：所述终端的驻留小区切换或小区重选，所述终端自动调整上行定位参考信号定时，所述终端接收到驻留小区的定时提前Timing advance命令。
  35. 根据权利要求33所述的方法，其中，所述终端发送第四指示信息包括：
    在满足以下条件中的至少之一时，发送所述第四指示信息：
    所述终端的驻留小区切换或小区重选；
    所述终端自动调整上行定位参考信号定时；
    所述终端接收到驻留小区的定时提前Timing advance命令。
  36. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，还包括：
    所述终端发送第五指示信息，所述第五指示信息用于指示驻留小区变化。
  37. 根据权利要求36所述的方法，其中，所述第五指示信息中还包括驻留小区的标识信息。
  38. 根据权利要求36所述的方法，其中，所述终端发送第五指示信息包 括：
    若所述终端的驻留小区切换，发送所述第五指示信息。
  39. 根据权利要求36所述的方法，还包括：
    若所述终端的驻留小区切换，且所述终端无法执行以下操作中的至少之一，所述终端发起随机接入进入连接态或者发送第三指示信息：
    所述终端无法发送上行定位参考信号；
    所述终端无法测量下行定位参考信号；
    所述终端无法上报位置相关信息；
    其中，所述第三指示信息用于指示定位参考信号的配置信息需要更新，所述定位参考信号包括上行定位参考信号和下行定位参考信号中的至少之一。
  40. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，终端在空闲态或非激活态执行定位操作还包括以下至少之一：
    若待发送的上行定位参考信号的时域位置距离寻呼时机超过距离X，所述终端忽略所述待发送的上行定位参考信号；
    若下行定位参考信号的时域位置距离寻呼时机超过距离X，所述终端忽略所述下行定位参考信号的测量；
    若位置相关信息上报的时域位置距离寻呼时机超过距离X，所述终端忽略所述位置相关信息的上报；
    若待发送的上行定位参考信号的时域位置距离所述下行定位参考信号的时域位置超过距离X，所述终端忽略所述待发送的上行定位参考信号。
  41. 根据权利要求40所述的方法，其中，所述寻呼时机为驻留小区的寻呼时机。
  42. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，所述接收并测量下行定位参考信号包括：
    根据下行定位参考信号与SSB的空间波束关系，接收并测量下行定位参考信号；
    其中，下行定位参考信号与SSB的空间波束关系，由网络侧设备指示的 下行定位参考信号与SSB的空间QCL关系获得；或者，根据下行定位参考信号资源与下行定位参考信号资源所在TRP下同步信号块突发中实际发送的SSB默认关系获得。
  43. 一种定位方法，其中，包括：
    终端在空闲态、非激活态或连接态执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括：上报位置相关信息，所述位置相关信息包括定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。
  44. 根据权利要求43所述的方法，其中，在下行和上行定位方法中，所述上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系包含在定位测量结果中。
  45. 一种定位方法，包括：
    网络侧设备执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括以下至少之一：
    向空闲态或非激活态的终端发送下行定位参考信号；
    接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的位置相关信息；
    测量空闲态或非激活态的终端发送的上行定位参考信号。
  46. 根据权利要求45所述的方法，还包括：
    所述网络侧设备向空闲态或非激活态的终端发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息包括以下至少之一：
    定位参考信号的可用性信息或者所述定位参考信号的配置信息的可用性信息；
    定位参考信号的配置信息的更新信息；
    其中，所述定位参考信号包括以下至少之一：所述上行定位参考信号和所述下行定位参考信号。
  47. 根据权利要求46所述的方法，其中，所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新信息包括以下至少之一：
    所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息；
    更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
  48. 根据权利要求46所述的方法，其中，所述第一指示信息还包括是否 进入连接态并更新所述定位参考信号的配置信息的指示信息。
  49. 根据权利要求46所述的方法，其中，所述网络侧设备向空闲态或非激活态的终端发送第一指示信息之后还包括：
    所述网络侧设备接收所述终端发送的第一反馈信息，所述第一反馈信息用于指示已收到所述第一指示信息。
  50. 根据权利要求49所述的方法，其中，所述第一反馈信息包括以下至少之一：
    反馈理由，所述反馈理由包括以下至少之一：所述定位参考信号的可用性指示反馈，所述定位参考信号的配置信息更新反馈，网络侧设备发起的所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新反馈；
    所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新响应，所述更新响应用于响应所述第一指示信息中的所述定位参考信号的配置信息是否有更新的指示信息。
  51. 根据权利要求49所述的方法，其中，所述网络侧设备接收所述终端发送的第一反馈信息之后还包括：
    所述网络侧设备向所述终端发送更新的所述定位参考信号的配置信息。
  52. 根据权利要求50所述的方法，其中，所述位置相关信息包括：第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示后续数据传输的信息，所述后续数据传输的信息包括以下至少之一：
    后续是否有数据传输；
    后续数据传输的大小；
    后续数据传输的周期；
    后续数据传输是否需要ACK反馈；
    后续待传输数据的业务特性；
    后续待传输数据的类型，所述类型包含以下至少之一：定位相关数据或非定位相关数据，控制面数据或者用户面数据，信令无线承载、非接入层或者数据无线承载数据。
  53. 根据权利要求52所述的方法，还包括：
    所述网络侧设备在网络侧设备配置的PDCCH调度的PUSCH上接收后续待传输数据。
  54. 根据权利要求45所述的方法，还包括：
    所述网络侧设备接收所述终端发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示定位参考信号的配置信息需要更新，所述定位参考信号包括上行定位参考信号和下行定位参考信号中的至少之一。
  55. 根据权利要求54所述的方法，其中，所述第三指示信息还包括：发送所述第三指示信息的理由，所述理由包括以下至少之一：所述终端发起的所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新，所述定位参考信号的配置信息的更新，所述定位参考信号的配置信息不可用。
  56. 根据权利要求54所述的方法，其中，所述第三指示信息中还包括以下至少之一：
    服务小区的RRM测量结果；
    邻小区的RRM测量结果；
    服务小区的定位参考信号的测量结果；
    邻小区的定位参考信号的测量结果。
  57. 根据权利要求54所述的方法，其中，所述网络侧设备接收所述终端发送第三指示信息之后还包括：
    向所述终端发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息包括以下至少之一：
    定位参考信号的可用性信息或者所述定位参考信号的配置信息的可用性信息；
    定位参考信号的配置信息的更新信息；
    其中，所述定位参考信号包括以下至少之一：所述上行定位参考信号和所述下行定位参考信号。
  58. 根据权利要求45所述的方法，其中，所述位置相关信息包括：测量信息，所述测量信息包括以下至少之一：
    服务小区的RRM测量结果；
    邻小区的RRM测量结果；
    服务小区的定位参考信号的测量结果；
    邻小区的定位参考信号的测量结果。
  59. 根据权利要求45所述的方法，其中，所述上行定位参考信号包括：非周期SRS或者半持续SRS。
  60. 根据权利要求45所述的方法，还包括：
    所述网络侧设备接收所述终端发送第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示上行定位参考信号定时变化。
  61. 根据权利要求45所述的方法，还包括：
    所述网络侧设备接收所述终端发送的第五指示信息，所述第五指示信息用于指示驻留小区变化。
  62. 根据权利要求45所述的方法，其中，接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的位置相关信息包括：
    接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。
  63. 一种定位方法，包括：
    网络侧设备执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括：
    接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的位置相关信息，所述位置相关信息包括定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。
  64. 一种定位装置，包括：
    定位模块，用于在空闲态或非激活态执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括以下至少之一：
    接收并测量下行定位参考信号；
    上报位置相关信息；
    发送上行定位参考信号。
  65. 一种定位装置，包括：
    定位模块，用于在空闲态、非激活态或连接态执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括：上报位置相关信息，所述位置相关信息包括定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。
  66. 一种定位装置，包括：
    定位模块，用于执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括以下至少之一：
    向空闲态或非激活态的终端发送下行定位参考信号；
    接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的位置相关信息；
    测量空闲态或非激活态的终端发送的上行定位参考信号。
  67. 一种定位装置，包括：
    定位模块，用于执行定位操作，其中，执行定位操作包括：
    接收空闲态或非激活态的终端上报的位置相关信息，所述位置相关信息包括定位测量结果与时间误差组的关联关系，和/或，上行定位参考信号与时间误差组的关联关系。
  68. 一种终端，包括处理器，存储器及存储在所述存储器上并可在所述处理器上运行的程序或指令，其中，所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时实现如权利要求1至42中任一项所述的定位方法的步骤；或者，所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时实现如权利要求43或44所述的定位方法的步骤。
  69. 一种网络侧设备，包括处理器，存储器及存储在所述存储器上并可在所述处理器上运行的程序或指令，其中，所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时实现如权利要求45至62中任一项所述的定位方法的步骤，或者，所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时实现如权利要求63所述的定位方法的步骤。
  70. 一种可读存储介质，所述可读存储介质上存储程序或指令，其中，所述程序或指令被处理器执行时实现如权利要求1至42中任一项所述的定位方法，或者所述程序或指令被处理器执行时实现如权利要求43或44所述的定位方法，或者所述程序或指令被处理器执行时实现如权利要求45至62中任一项所述的定位方法的步骤，或者所述程序或指令被处理器执行时实现如 权利要求63所述的定位方法的步骤。
  71. 一种芯片，包括处理器和通信接口，其中，所述通信接口和所述处理器耦合，所述处理器用于运行程序或指令，实现如权利要求1至42中任一项所述的定位方法，或者实现如权利要求43或44所述的定位方法，或者实现如权利要求45至62中任一项所述的定位方法的步骤，或者实现如权利要求63所述的定位方法的步骤。
  72. 一种计算机程序产品，其中，所述计算机程序产品被存储在非瞬态的存储介质中，所述计算机程序产品被至少一个处理器执行以实现如权利要求1至42中任一项所述的定位方法，或者实现如权利要求43或44所述的定位方法，或者实现如权利要求45至62中任一项所述的定位方法的步骤，或者实现如权利要求63所述的定位方法的步骤。
  73. 一种通信设备，被配置为执行如权利要求1至42中任一项所述的定位方法，或者执行如权利要求43或44所述的定位方法，或者执行如权利要求45至62中任一项所述的定位方法的步骤，或者执行如权利要求63所述的定位方法的步骤。
PCT/CN2022/083018 2021-03-26 2022-03-25 定位方法、终端及网络侧设备 WO2022199689A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP22774343.2A EP4319203A1 (en) 2021-03-26 2022-03-25 Positioning method, terminal, and network side device
US18/373,224 US20240031934A1 (en) 2021-03-26 2023-09-26 Positioning method, terminal, and network-side device

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110327009.3 2021-03-26
CN202110327009.3A CN115134742A (zh) 2021-03-26 2021-03-26 定位方法、终端及网络侧设备

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/373,224 Continuation US20240031934A1 (en) 2021-03-26 2023-09-26 Positioning method, terminal, and network-side device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022199689A1 true WO2022199689A1 (zh) 2022-09-29

Family

ID=83374747

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/083018 WO2022199689A1 (zh) 2021-03-26 2022-03-25 定位方法、终端及网络侧设备

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US20240031934A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4319203A1 (zh)
CN (1) CN115134742A (zh)
WO (1) WO2022199689A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024082265A1 (zh) * 2022-10-21 2024-04-25 北京小米移动软件有限公司 终端控制方法、装置、设备及介质
WO2024092676A1 (zh) * 2022-11-03 2024-05-10 北京小米移动软件有限公司 定位处理方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质
CN117320137B (zh) * 2023-11-29 2024-02-23 上海卫星互联网研究院有限公司 发送方法、接收方法、装置、设备及存储介质
CN117687013B (zh) * 2024-02-04 2024-05-17 中亿(深圳)信息科技有限公司 基于5g的安防高精度定位方法
CN118042595A (zh) * 2024-04-15 2024-05-14 成都爱瑞无线科技有限公司 定位方法、装置及通信设备

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20190182794A1 (en) * 2016-08-10 2019-06-13 Sony Corporation Methods, network, integrated circuitry and apparatus for telecommunications device location
CN111972013A (zh) * 2020-07-07 2020-11-20 北京小米移动软件有限公司 定位方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质
WO2022025371A1 (en) * 2020-07-28 2022-02-03 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for positioning of user equipment

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20190182794A1 (en) * 2016-08-10 2019-06-13 Sony Corporation Methods, network, integrated circuitry and apparatus for telecommunications device location
CN111972013A (zh) * 2020-07-07 2020-11-20 北京小米移动软件有限公司 定位方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质
WO2022025371A1 (en) * 2020-07-28 2022-02-03 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for positioning of user equipment

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
CATT: ""FL Summary for accuracy improvements by mitigating UE Rx/Tx and/or gNB Rx/Tx timing delays"", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 MEETING #104-E R1-2101764, 29 January 2021 (2021-01-29), XP051975868 *
HUAWEI, HISILICON: "[AT113-e][609][POS] Continued discussion of positioning in idle/inactive (Huawei)", 3GPP DRAFT; R2-2102336, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), 10 February 2021 (2021-02-10), XP051978055 *
XIAOMI COMMUNICATIONS: "Positioning enhancements for RRC IDLE and RRC INACTIVE state UE", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2003977, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), 15 May 2020 (2020-05-15), XP051885739 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP4319203A1 (en) 2024-02-07
US20240031934A1 (en) 2024-01-25
CN115134742A (zh) 2022-09-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022199689A1 (zh) 定位方法、终端及网络侧设备
US10149339B2 (en) Base station, user equipment and methods for random access
WO2022028467A1 (zh) 定位方法、装置及相关设备
EP3178272B1 (en) Resource allocation and ue behavior for d2d synchronization signal transmission for inter-cell d2d discovery
WO2022135506A1 (zh) 非连接态定位方法、装置及设备
US20150056982A1 (en) Methods and Network Nodes for Management of Resources
WO2022042752A1 (zh) 物理下行控制信道的监听方法、装置和设备
US20230336308A1 (en) Uplink positioning processing method and related device
WO2017051381A1 (en) Systems, methods, and apparatuses for reducing delay for sidelink transmissions
WO2022068797A1 (zh) 网络接入方法、网络接入装置、终端和网络侧设备
EP3944656B1 (en) Entering drx active time for drx groups
US20230239933A1 (en) Random access method and apparatus, and related device
US20230217512A1 (en) Connection establishment method, apparatus, device, and storage medium
WO2023280138A1 (zh) 初始带宽部分配置的获取方法、终端及网络侧设备
WO2015026277A1 (en) Methods and network nodes for management of resources
US20240008015A1 (en) Methods, communications devices, and infrastructure equipment
WO2022033476A1 (zh) 处理方法、配置方法及相关设备
WO2022206794A1 (zh) 定位方法、终端及网络侧设备
US20230164735A1 (en) Positioning method and apparatus, and related device
WO2024065529A1 (en) Methods and apparatuses for a pdcch monitoring enhancement mechanism for xr traffic
WO2023138510A1 (zh) 配置确定方法、装置、终端及网络侧设备
WO2023124823A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
WO2024078611A1 (zh) 信息配置方法、装置、终端及网络侧设备
WO2022247779A1 (zh) 传输方法、装置、设备及可读存储介质
CN111937478B (zh) 随机接入过程中的后备配置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22774343

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2022774343

Country of ref document: EP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022774343

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20231026